You are on page 1of 288

OWNER HANDBOOK

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cop Alfa Giulietta EN QUAD 12/03/14 08.33 Pagina 2

WHY CHOOSING
GENUINE PARTS

We really know your car because we invented, designed and built it: we really know every single detail.
At Alfa Romeo Service authorised workshops you can find technicians directly trained by us,
offering quality and professionalism for all service operations.
Alfa Romeo workshops are always close to you for the regular servicing operations, season checks
and practical recommendations by our experts.
With Alfa Romeo Genuine Parts you keep the reliability, comfort and performance features
of your new car unchanged in time: that's why you bought it for.
Always ask for Genuine Parts for the components used on our cars; we recommend them because
they come from our steady commitment in research and development of highly innovative technologies.
For all these reasons: rely on Genuine Parts, because they are the only ones
designed by Alfa Romeo for your car.

SAFETY: ENVIRONMENT: PARTICULATE FILTERS, COMFORT: SUSPENSION PERFORMANCE: SPARK PLUGS, LINEACCESSORI
BRAKING SYSTEM CLIMATE CONTROL MAINTENANCE AND WINDSCREEN WIPERS INJECTORS AND BATTERIES ROOF RACK BARS, WHEEL RIMS

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 1

Dear Customer,
We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing an Alfa Romeo. We have written this handbook to help you get to know all the
features of your car and use it in the best possible way. You should read it right through before taking to the road for the first time.
Here you will find information, advice and important warnings regarding use of your car and how to achieve the best performance from the
technological features of your Alfa Romeo. It also provides a description of special features and essential information for the care and
maintenance of your Alfa Romeo over time as well as for safe driving.
We urge you to read the warnings and indications found throughout the text with care, marked with the following symbols:

personal safety;

car safety;

environmental protection.

NOTE These symbols, when necessary, are indicated at the end of each paragraph and are followed by a number. This number
recalls the corresponding warning at the end of the relevant section.
In the attached Warranty Booklet you will also find a description of the Services that Alfa Romeo offers to its customers, the Warranty
Certificate and the detail of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity.
We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate your new car and the service provided by the people at Alfa Romeo.
Enjoy reading and happy motoring!

This Owner Handbook describes all versions of the Alfa Giulietta; please consider only the information relevant to your
cars trim level, engine and version. All data contained in this publication is purely indicative. Fiat Group Automobiles can
modify the specifications of the vehicle model described in this publication at any time, for technical or marketing
purposes. For further information, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 2

VERY IMPORTANT
REFUELLING
Petrol engines: only refuel with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) not less than 95 in compliance with the European specification
EN228. Diesel engines: refuel only with diesel fuel conforming to the European specification EN590. The use of other products or mixtures
may damage the engine beyond repair and consequently invalidate the warranty, due to the damage caused.

STARTING THE ENGINE


Petrol engines: make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gear lever to neutral; fully depress the clutch pedal without pressing the
accelerator, then turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine has started. Diesel engines: turn the ignition key to
MAR-ON and wait for the and warning lights to switch off. Then turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine
has started.

PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL


The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the car on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other
flammable material: fire hazard.

RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT


The car is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the
environment.

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
If, after buying the car, you decide to add electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership. They will calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the cars electrical system can support the required load.

CODE Card (for versions/markets, where provided)


Keep it in a safe place, not in the car. Always carry the electronic code provided on the CODE card with you, in the case you need to perform
an emergency start.

SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring that it maintains its performance and its safety features, its environmental friendliness
and low running costs for a long time to come.

THE OWNER MANUAL CONTAINS


important information, advice and warnings for correct use, driving safety and maintenance of the car over time. Special attention must be
paid to the symbols provided (personal safety) (environmental protection) (car integrity).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 4

This page is intentionally left blank

4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 5

GRAPHICAL INDEX
.

1 A0K0620

HEADLIGHTS Wheel repair .......................................165 BONNET


Bulb types ..........................................176 DOOR MIRRORS Opening/closing .................................. 59
External lights ..................................... 35 Adjustment ......................................... 20 WINDSCREEN WIPERS
Bulb replacement ................................173 Folding ............................................... 21 Blade replacement ..............................213
WHEELS DOORS
Rims and tyres ....................................236
Central opening/closing ...................... 51
Tyre pressure ......................................239

5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 6

.
GRAPHICAL INDEX

2 A0K0621

REAR LIGHTS REAR WINDOW WIPER


Bulb types ..........................................176 Blade replacement ..............................214
.

Bulb replacement ................................178

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
Opening/closing .................................. 56

6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 7

2 1 6

11 10 9 8 7
3 A0K0661

AIR VENTS UConnect Radio/UConnect Radio CONTROL BUTTONS


Climate control system ....................... 22 Nav (for versions/markets, where Door locking ....................................... 45
provided) Fog lights ............................................ 44
LEFT STALK
PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG Rear fog lights .................................... 44
External lights iTPMS system (for versions/markets
Operation ...........................................140
INSTRUMENT PANEL whereprovided).................................. 72
GLOVE COMPARTMENT
Control panel and on-board
instruments ......................................... 94 Opening .............................................. 46 STEERING WHEEL
Warning lights ..................................... 99 HEATER/CLIMATE CONTROL Adjustment ......................................... 19
RIGHT STALK SYSTEM Driver side front airbag ........................140
Window cleaning ................................ 39 Climate comfort .................................. 23
Manual climate control system ............ 24
Automatic dual-zone climate control CRUISE CONTROL LEVER (for
system................................................ 28 versions/markets, where provided)
Operation ........................................... 40
7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 8
GRAPHICAL INDEX

4 A0K0662

SEATS HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS


Adjustments ....................................... 17 Operation ........................................... 44
ALFA DNA SYSTEM HANDBRAKE
Operation ........................................... 66 Activation ............................................149
MANUAL GEARBOX
Using the gearbox/transmission ..........150

8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 9

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

In-depth knowledge of your new car SYMBOLS ...................................... 10 ESC SYSTEM ................................. 62
starts here. ALFA ROMEO CODE SYSTEM ....... 10 ALFA DNA SYSTEM (CAR
The booklet that you are reading simply THE KEYS....................................... 11 DYNAMIC CONTROL SYSTEM) ...... 66
and directly explains how it is made START&STOP SYSTEM .................. 69
and how it works. ALARM ........................................... 14
IGNITION DEVICE ........................... 15 ITPMS (INDIRECT TYRE
Thats why we advise you to read it PRESSURE MONITORING
seated comfortably on board, so that SEATS ............................................ 17 SYSTEM) ........................................ 72
you can see what is described here for
yourself. HEAD RESTRAINTS........................ 18 EOBD SYSTEM (EUROPEAN ON
STEERING WHEEL ......................... 19 BOARD DIAGNOSIS) ...................... 74
REAR VIEW MIRRORS.................... 20 DUAL PINION ACTIVE STEERING... 74
CLIMATE CONTROL ....................... 22 WIRING FOR RADIO SYSTEM ........ 75
CLIMATIC COMFORT ..................... 23 ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY
THE OWNER .................................. 76
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL........ 24
AUTOMATIC DUAL ZONE PARKING SENSORS....................... 77
CLIMATE CONTROL ....................... 28 REFUELLING THE CAR .................. 80
EXTERNAL LIGHTS......................... 35 PROTECTING THE
WINDOW CLEANING...................... 38 ENVIRONMENT .............................. 81
CRUISE CONTROL......................... 40
ROOF LIGHTS ................................ 42
CONTROLS .................................... 44
INTERIOR FITTINGS ....................... 46
ELECTRIC SUN ROOF.................... 49
DOORS........................................... 51
ELECTRIC WINDOWS .................... 53
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT........... 56
BONNET ......................................... 59
ROOF RACK/SKI RACK.................. 60
HEADLIGHTS.................................. 61
9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 10

SYMBOLS ALFA ROMEO CODE Each time the ignition key is turned to
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

SYSTEM STOP, the Alfa Romeo CODE system


Some car components have coloured deactivates the functions of the engine
labels whose symbols indicate management control unit.
IN BRIEF
precautions to be observed when using
this component. Under the bonnet Irregular operation
there is also a label that summarises all This is an electronic engine locking
the symbols. system which increases protection If, during starting, the code is not
against attempted thefts of the car. It correctly recognised, the warning
is automatically activated when the light (on some versions a message
ignition key is removed. together with a symbol is shown on the
display) switches on in the instrument
There is an electronic device in each
panel.
key which can identify the signal
emitted, when the engine is started, In this case, turn the key to STOP and
from an aerial built into the ignition then to MAR-ON; if it is still locked,
switch. The signal, which changes try again with the other keys that come
each time the engine is started, is the with the car. If it is still not possible to
password by means of which the start the engine, contact an Alfa Romeo
control unit recognises the key and Dealership.
enables starting. 1)
Activation of warning
Operation light while driving
Each time the car is started by turning If the warning light (or symbol on
the ignition key to MAR-ON, the Alfa the display) switches on, this means
Romeo CODE system control unit that the system is running self-
sends an acknowledgement code to diagnosis (caused, for example, by a
the engine management control unit to voltage drop).
deactivate the inhibitor. If the warning light (or symbol on
The code is sent only if the Alfa Romeo the display) stays on, contact an Alfa
CODE system control unit has Romeo Dealership.
recognised the code transmitted by the
key.

10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 11

THE KEYS
CODE CARD
(for versions/markets, where provided)
IMPORTANT The CODE Card fig. 5 is provided
with the keys and bears the following:
1) The electronic components inside
the key may be damaged if the
key is subjected to sharp knocks.
In order to ensure complete 6 A0K0545
efficiency of the electronic
devices inside the key, it should KEY WITH REMOTE
never be exposed to direct CONTROL
sunlight. (for versions/markets, where provided)

Operation
5 A0K0544 The metal insert A operates:
the ignition switch;
A - electronic code;
the door lock.
B - mechanical code.
Press button B to open/close the metal
Keep the codes in a safe place, not in
insert. 1)
the car.

KEY WITHOUT REMOTE


CONTROL

Operation
The metal insert A fig. 6 operates:
the ignition switch;
the door lock.

7 A0K0546

11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 12

Door and luggage When a speed of over 20 km/h is Opening the luggage
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

compartment lock reached, the doors are automatically compartment


release locked if this specific function has been Press the button to open the
Briefly press button : unlocking of set (only on versions with "Multi- luggage compartment remotely. The
doors, timed switching on of internal function reconfigurable display"). direction indicators will flash twice
roof lights and double flashing of When the doors are locked from to indicate that the luggage
direction indicators (for versions/ outside the car (using the remote compartment has been opened.
markets, where provided). control), LED A fig. 8 will switch on for a
The doors are unlocked automatically if few seconds and then start flashing REQUESTING
ADDITIONAL REMOTE
the fuel cut-off system intervenes. (deterrent function). CONTROLS
Once the doors are locked, if one or The system can recognise up to 8 keys
more doors or the luggage with incorporated remote control. If
compartment are not closed correctly, you need to request a new remote
the LED and direction indicators start control, contact an Alfa Romeo
flashing quickly. Dealership, taking the CODE Card (for
versions/markets, where provided),
Door and luggage an identity document and documents
compartment locking
proving ownership of the car with you.
Briefly press button : locking of
doors, switching off of internal roof REPLACING THE
8 A0K0588
BATTERY IN THE KEY
lights and single flashing of direction
indicators (for versions/markets, where WITH REMOTE CONTROL
When the doors are locked from inside
provided).
the car (by pressing the button on Procedure
If one or more door are open, the doors the dashboard) the LED will remain on 1)
will not be locked. This is indicated by constantly.
a rapid flashing of the direction press button A fig. 9 and move the
indicators (for versions/markets, where metal insert B to opening position;
provided). The doors will be locked if turn screw C to using a fine
the tailgate is open however. bit screwdriver;

12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 13

remove battery compartment D and Switching the device on


replace battery E, respecting the The device is enabled on all the doors
polarity; reinsert compartment D in by pressing the button on the key
the key and secure it by turning twice quickly. Device activation is
screw C to . indicated by 3 flashes of the direction WARNING
indicators and a flash of the LED on the
button fig. 8. The device does not 1) Press button B fig. 7 only with the
come on if one or more doors is not key away from your body,
properly shut. especially your eyes and from
objects which could get damaged
Deactivating the device (e.g. your clothes). Do not leave
the key unattended, to prevent
The device disengages automatically people, especially children, from
by: inadvertently pressing the button.
the key insert is turned to opening
9 A0K0547 position in the driver side door;
press button on the key;
SAFE LOCK DEVICE
(for versions/markets, where provided) by turning the ignition key to the
MAR-ON position. IMPORTANT
This safety device inhibits the operation
of the interior door handles and the IMPORTANT Once the safe lock system
door locking/unlocking button. We 1) Used batteries may be harmful to
is engaged, it is impossible to open
recommend that you activate this the environment if not disposed of
the doors from inside the car. Therefore,
device each time you park the car. correctly. They must be disposed
before getting out of the car check
of as specified by law in the
that there is no one left on board. If the special containers or taken to an
remote control battery is flat, the device Alfa Romeo Dealership, which will
can only be deactivated by using the take care of their disposal.
metal insert in one of the door locks.

13
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 14

ALARM IMPORTANT The engine locking If the alarm emits an acoustic signal
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

(for versions/markets, where provided) function is guaranteed by the Alfa even when the doors, bonnet and
Romeo CODE, which is automatically luggage compartment are correctly
ALARM ACTIVATION activated when the ignition key is closed, a fault has occurred in system
extracted from the ignition switch. operation: in this case, contact an
The alarm activates in the following
Alfa Romeo Dealership.
cases: IMPORTANT The alarm is adapted to
wrongful opening of a door/bonnet/ meet requirements in various countries. ALARM SELF-ACTIVATION
luggage compartment (perimeter (for versions/markets, where provided)
protection); SWITCHING ON THE If the alarm has not been activated
ALARM
wrongful operation of the ignition using the remote control, once about
switch (ignition key turned to With the doors, bonnet and tailgate 30 seconds have elapsed from when
MAR-ON); closed and the ignition key either the ignition key was turned to STOP
turned to STOP or removed, point the and a door or the tailgate was last
cutting of the battery cables; key with remote control towards the car opened and then closed, the alarm
movement inside the passenger and press and release the button. activates automatically.
compartment (volumetric protection); Except for specific markets, the system This is indicated by the LED on the
anomalous lifting/tilting of the car (for emits a visual and acoustic signal and button A fig. 10 lighting up intermittently
versions/markets, where provided). enables door locking. and the indications of activation
A self-diagnosis stage precedes the described previously.
Operation of the alarm is indicated by
an acoustic and visual signal (flashing of switching on of the alarm: in the event To deactivate the alarm, press the
the direction indicators for several of faults, the system will generate a button on the remote control.
seconds). The alarm activation modes further acoustic and/or visual signal
The alarm also activates when the
may vary according to the market. through the LED on the dashboard.
doors are closed by turning the metal
There is a maximum number of If after the alarm is switched on, a insert of the key in the driver side door
acoustic/visual cycles. When this is second acoustic signal is emitted latch. If the system self-activates, the
reached the system returns to normal and/or a visual signal via the LED on doors are not locked.
operation. the dashboard, wait about 4 seconds
and switch off the alarm by pressing the
button, check that the doors,
bonnet and luggage compartment are
closed correctly and then reactivate the
system by pressing the button.

14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 15

SWITCHING OFF THE IGNITION DEVICE


ALARM
Press the button. The following The key can be turned to three different
operations are performed (excluding positions fig. 11:
some markets): STOP: engine off, key can be
the direction indicators flash briefly removed, steering column locked.
twice; Some electrical devices (e.g. car
radio, central door locking system,
there are two brief acoustic signals; alarm, etc.) are enabled;
unlocking of the doors. 10 A0K0548
MAR: driving position. All electrical
devices are enabled;
IMPORTANT The alarm does not switch DISABLING THE ALARM
off when the central opening is AVV: engine start-up.
activated using the metal insert in the To completely deactivate the alarm (e.g.
key. during a lengthy period of car
inactivity), close the doors by turning
VOLUMETRIC/ANTI-LIFT the metal insert of the key with remote
PROTECTION control in the door lock.
To guarantee the correct operation of IMPORTANT If the batteries of the key
the protection, close the side windows with the remote control run out or
and any sun roof completely (for the system fails, the alarm can
versions/markets, where provided). be switched off by placing the key in
To disable the function, press button A the ignition switch and then turning it to
11 A0K0362
fig. 10 before activating the alarm. MAR-ON.
When the function is disabled, this is
The ignition switch is fitted with a safety
indicated by the LED on the button
system that requires the ignition key
flashing for several seconds.
to be turned back to STOP if the engine
Any disabling of the volumetric/anti-lift does not start, before the starting
protection must be repeated each operation can be repeated. 2) 3)
time the instrument panel is switched
off.

15
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 16

STEERING LOCK 4) It is absolutely forbidden to carry SEATS


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

out any after-market operation


Engagement involving steering system or FRONT SEATS
steering column modifications
When the key is at STOP, remove the
(e.g.: installation of anti-theft Lengthwise adjustment
key and turn the steering wheel until
device). This could badly affect
it locks. Lift lever A fig. 12 and push the seat
performance and safety,
Disengagement invalidate the warranty and also forwards or backwards: in the driving
result in the non-compliance position your arms should rest on
Move the steering wheel slightly and the rim of the steering wheel.
of the car with approval
turn the ignition key to MAR-ON. 4) 5)
requirements. 6) 7)
5) Never remove the key while the
car is moving. The steering wheel
will lock as soon as it is turned.
This holds true for cars being
towed as well.
WARNING

2) If the ignition device has been


tampered with (e.g. an attempted
theft), have it checked over by a
Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as
possible.
3) When getting out of the car,
always remove the key to prevent
someone from accidentally
activating the controls.
Remember to engage the
handbrake. Engage 1st gear if the
car is parked uphill or reverse if
the car is parked downhill. Never
leave children unattended in the
car. 12 A0K0366

16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 17

Height adjustment Electric lumbar C: Driver's side seat position memory


(for versions/markets, where provided) adjustment buttons.
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Move lever B fig. 12 up or down until IMPORTANT Electric adjustment is only
With the key turned to MAR-ON, press
the required height is reached. possible with the ignition key turned
button B fig. 13 to switch the function
on/off. to MAR-ON and for approximately
IMPORTANT Carry out the adjustment
1 minute after turning it to STOP. The
whilst seated in the driver's seat. When the function is enabled, the LED
seat can be moved after opening the
on the button switches on.
door for about 3 minutes, or until the
Backrest angle
adjustment door is closed.
FRONT SEATS WITH
ELECTRIC ADJUSTMENT
Turn knob C fig. 12 until the required (for versions/markets, where provided) Memorising drivers
position is reached. seat positions
The controls for seat adjustment are fig.
8)
14: Buttons C allow three different drivers
seat positions to be memorised and
Electric seat heating recalled.
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Memorisation and recall are possible
With the key turned to MAR-ON, press
with the ignition key in MAR-ON
button A fig. 13 to switch the function
position and for 3 minutes after opening
on/off.
the driver's side door or until the door
When the function is enabled, the LED is closed, even when the ignition key
on the button switches on. is to the STOP position.
The performed position memorisation is
confirmed by a beep.
14 A0K0214
To memorise a seat position, adjust it
Multifunction control A: with the various controls, then press the
button where you want to memorise
seat height adjustment (vertical seat the position for several seconds.
movement);
When a new seat position is
lengthwise seat movement; memorised, the previously memorised
B: Backrest angle and lumbar position on the same button is
13 A0K0213 adjustment; automatically overwritten.

17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 18

Recalling a memorised position is also HEAD RESTRAINTS


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

possible for about 3 minutes after


the doors are opened and about 1 FRONT
minute after the ignition key is turned to
These are height-adjustable and lock
the STOP position. WARNING
into the desired position automatically.
To recall a memorised position, press
For the height adjustments proceed
the relevant button briefly. 6) All adjustments must be made
solely with the car stationary.
as follows: 9)

SEAT HEATING upwards adjustment: raise the head


7) After releasing the adjustment
(for versions/markets, where provided) lever, always check that the seat
restraint until it clicks into place;
With the ignition key at MAR-ON, is locked on the guides by trying downwards adjustment: press button
turn ring nut A fig. 15 to switch the to move it back and forth. Failure A fig. 16 and lower the head restraint.
function on/off. to lock the seat in place could
result in its unexpected
movement and the driver losing
control of the car.
8) For maximum protection keep the
backrest upright, lean back into it
and make sure that the seat belt
fits closely across the chest and
pelvis.

16 A0K0624

15 A0K0215

Proceed as follows to remove the head


Heating can be set to 3 different levels restraints:
(0 = seat heating off). raise the head restraints to their
maximum height;
press buttons A and B fig. 16, then
remove the head restraints by pulling
them upwards.

18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 19

Anti-Whiplash device STEERING WHEEL


The head restraints are equipped with
It can be adjusted axially and vertically.
an Anti-Whiplash device, which
reduces the distance between head To adjust, release the lever by pushing it
and head restraint in the event of a rear forwards (position 1 fig. 18) and adjust
impact, thus mitigating the whiplash the steering wheel. Having made the
effect. adjustment, lock lever A by pulling
it towards the steering wheel (position
The head restraint may move when the
2). 10) 11)
backrest is pressed by the occupant's
torso or hand: this behaviour is caused 17 A0K0625 NOTE The "Quadrifoglio Verde"
by the system and should not be versions are equipped with sports
considered a malfunction. configuration steering wheel.

REAR
Two height-adjustable head restraints
WARNING
are provided for the back seats (for the
adjustment see the previous
paragraph). 9) The head restraints must be
adjusted so that the head, rather
On some versions a head restraint is than the neck, rests on them. Only
also provided for the central seat. in this case they can protect your
Proceed as follows to remove the head head correctly.
restraints: 18 A0K0700

raise the head restraints to their


maximum height;
press buttons A and B fig. 17, then
remove the head restraints by pulling
them upwards.

19
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 20

REAR VIEW Electrochromic interior


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

MIRRORS mirror
(for versions/markets, where provided)
INTERNAL MIRROR The electrochromic rear view mirror
WARNING fig. 20 comes with an adjustment
The rear view mirror has two different
device to automatically prevent dazzling
positions: normal or anti-glare.
10) Any adjustment of the steering effects due to following cars. This
wheel position must be carried function is set as default.
Adjustment
out only with the car stationary
and the engine turned off. The mirror must be adjusted starting
from the normal position, with the lever
11) It is absolutely forbidden to carry
out any after-market operation
A fig. 19 towards the windscreen
involving steering system or (daytime use).
steering column modifications To prevent dazzling effects due to
(e.g. installation of anti-theft following cars, the mirror can be moved
device) that could adversely affect into the anti-glare position by moving
performance and safety, the lever A towards the back of the car.
invalidate the warranty and also
result in the car not meeting 20 A0K0550

type-approval requirements.
When reverse gear is engaged, the
mirror is automatically set for daytime
use.
When reverse gear is engaged, the
mirror is automatically set for daytime
use.

19 A0K0549

20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 21

DOOR MIRRORS Electric mirror folding


(for versions/markets, where provided)
Electric adjustment To fold the mirrors, press button C
The mirrors can only be adjusted/folded fig. 21. Press the button again to
with the ignition in the MAR position. restore the mirrors to the driving WARNING
position.
Select the desired mirror using device A
fig. 21 12):
12) As the driver's door mirror is
Mirror manual folding curved, it may slightly alter the
perception of distance.
If necessary, fold the mirrors, moving
them from position 1 to position 2
fig. 22.

21 A0K0551

device in position 1: left mirror


selected
22 A0K0552
device in position 2: right mirror
selected.
IMPORTANT When driving the mirrors
To adjust the selected mirror, press must always be in position 1.
button B in the four directions shown
by the arrows.

IMPORTANT Once adjustment is


complete, rotate device A to position 0
to prevent accidental movements.

21
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 22

CLIMATE CONTROL REAR AIR DIFFUSER


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

(for versions/markets, where provided)


SIDE AIR DIFFUSERS Use device A fig. 26 to adjust the
A fig. 23 - Adjustable and directable diffuser to the desired position.
side air diffusers:
use device B to adjust the diffuser to
the desired position;
turn wheel C left to adjust the air flow.
24 A0K0604

UPPER AIR DIFFUSERS


A fig. 25 - Upper adjustable air
diffusers. Turn wheels B to the right to
26 A0K0606
adjust the air flow.
Turn wheel B to the right to adjust the
air flow:
= Completely closed
23 A0K0603
= Completely open
D - Fixed side air diffuser.

CENTRAL AIR
DIFFUSERS
Use device A fig. 24 to adjust the
25 A0K0605
diffusers to the desired position.
Turn wheels B downwards to adjust the C - Fixed upper air diffuser.
air flow.

22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 23

CLIMATIC COMFORT
DIFFUSERS

27 A0K0602

1. Fixed upper diffuser 2. Fixed upper diffusers 3. Fixed side vents 4. Adjustable side vents 5. Adjustable centre vents 6. Lower diffusers for
rear seats 7. Adjustable vent for rear seats (for versions/markets, where provided) 8. Lower diffusers for front seats

23
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 24

MANUAL CLIMATE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

CONTROL
.

CONTROLS

28 A0K0553

A - Air temperature adjustment knob: C - fan activation/adjustment knob: various selections are possible
blue section = cold air 0 = fan off quick demisting of windscreen and
red section = hot air 1-2-3-4-5-6 = fan speed side windows

B - climate control compressor on/off D - heated rear window on/off button; F - air recirculation on/off button
button; E - air distribution knob:

24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 25

CLIMATE CONTROL turn knob E to ; the heated rear window (and all
(cooling) defrosting devices in the car) will be
turn knob C to 6 (maximum fan
To cool, proceed as follows: speed). turned on. The circular LED around
the button will light up to indicate
turn knob A to the blue section; Then use the controls to maintain the that the function has been activated;
press button F to turn internal air desired comfort conditions and press
button F to turn internal air recirculation the air flow will go to maximum
recirculation on (circular LED around
off (circular LED around the button off) speed (6th);
the button on);
and prevent misting. air circulation will be opened, if it was
turn knob E to ;
closed (the circular LED around the
press button B to turn the climate IMPORTANT When the engine is cold, it corresponding button will be off);
control system on and turn knob C to takes a few minutes to obtain fast
air mixing will go to maximum heat;
at least 1 (1st speed); for faster heating.
action, turn knob C to 6 (maximum the additional electric heater (for
fan speed). AUTOMATIC versions/markets, where provided)
DEMISTING/DEFROSTING will be turned on;
(MAX-DEF function)
Adjusting cooling the compressor will be activated (the
This function activates automatic circular LED will switch on to indicate
Proceed as follows: demisting/defrosting of: front windows that the AC function is on).
turn knob A to the right to increase (windscreen and side windows), heated
the temperature; nozzles, heated exterior rear view
Window demisting
press button F to turn internal air mirrors.
The climate control system is very
recirculation off (circular LED around To activate the function, turn knob E to
useful in preventing the windows from
the button off); the Defrosting symbol identified by
misting up in the event of high levels
turn knob C to reduce the fan speed. the symbol.
of humidity.
The manual climate control system will
In the event of considerable outside
PASSENGER automatically set itself to the following
COMPARTMENT HEATING moisture and/or rain and/or
configuration:
considerable differences in temperature
For rapid heating, proceed as follows: the demisting symbol will turn inside and outside the passenger
turn knob A to the red section; from red to orange (to indicate that compartment, proceed as follows to
the function has been activated); demist the windows:
press button F to turn on the internal
air recirculation system; turn knob A to the red section;

25
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 26

press button F to turn internal air INTERNAL AIR Air flow to the front/rear footwell
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

recirculation off (circular LED around RECIRCULATION diffusers. This air distribution allows
the button off); Press button F ( ) so that the LED the passenger compartment to
turn knob E to with the possibility around the button turns on. It is be warmed up quickly.
of moving it to position (B) if advisable to switch internal air Air flow distribution between front
demisting does not occur; recirculation on while standing in traffic and rear diffusers, centre/side
or in tunnels to prevent the introduction dashboard diffusers, rear diffuser
turn knob C to the 2nd speed.
of polluted air. and windscreen and front side
Do not use the function for a long time, window demisting/defrosting
HEATED REAR WINDOW
DEMISTING/DEFROSTING particularly if there are many diffusers.
passengers on board, to prevent the Air flow distribution to centre/side
Press button D ( ) to activate/
windows from misting up. dashboard diffusers (passenger's
deactivate the function. The function is
body).
automatically deactivated after 20
IMPORTANT Internal air recirculation There are also another 4 positions (see
minutes.
makes it possible to reach the required diagram below fig. 29):
For versions/markets where provided, heating or cooling conditions more
press the button to activate quickly depending on the mode
demisting/defrosting of exterior rear selected. Do not use the air
view mirrors and heated nozzles (for recirculation function on rainy/cold days
versions/markets, where provided). as it would considerably increase the
possibility of the windows misting.
IMPORTANT Do not affix stickers to the
inside of the heated rear window over SETTING THE AIR
the heating filaments, to avoid damage DISTRIBUTION
that might cause them to stop working
Turn knob E to manually select one of
properly.
the four possible air distribution settings 29 A0K0554
in the passenger compartment:
Air flow to the windscreen and front
side window diffusers to demist/
defrost them.

26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 27

Position A: Air flow distribution START&STOP


between centre/side dashboard
vents, rear diffuser and windscreen Manual climate control
and front side window demisting/ If the Start&Stop function is activated
defrosting diffusers. This (engine off when the car speed is
distribution setting ventilates the 0 km/h), the system keeps the air flow
passenger compartment well and selected by the user.
prevents the windows from misting
up. In these conditions, the compartment
cooling and heating cannot be
Position B: Air flow distributed
guaranteed, as the compressor stops
between footwell diffusers and
with the engine coolant pump.
windscreen and front side window
defrosting/demisting diffusers. The Start&Stop function can be
This distribution setting allows the deactivated to enhance the operation of
passenger compartment to warm the climate control system by pressing
up efficiently and prevents the the dedicated button on the
windows from misting up. dashboard.
Position C: Air flow distribution
SERVICING
between footwell diffusers (hotter MAINTENANCE
air) and centre/side dashboard
diffusers and rear diffuser (cooler In winter, the climate control system
air). must be turned on at least once a
month for about 10 minutes.
Position D: Automatic
demisting/defrosting activation Have the system inspected at an Alfa
(see description in previous Romeo Dealership before the summer.
pages).

27
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 28

AUTOMATIC DUAL
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

ZONE CLIMATE
CONTROL
(for versions/markets, where provided)
.

CONTROLS

30 A0K0555

A - driver side temperature adjustment C - climate control system compressor F - fan speed adjustment knob;
knob; on/off button; G - Fan speed indicator LED;
B - internal air recirculation on/off D - heated rear window on/off button; H - air distribution selection buttons;
button; E - climate control on/off button;

28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 29

I - MAX-DEF function (rapid defrosting/ fan speed (continuous variation of the The system allows the following to be
demisting of front windows), heated air flow); set or adjusted manually:
rear window and heated exterior mirrors compressor engagement (for driver's/passenger side air
(for versions/markets, where provided) cooling/dehumidifying the air); temperature;
activation button;
air recirculation. fan speed (continuous variation);
L - passenger side temperature
adjustment knob; All these functions can be adjusted air distribution pattern with 7
manually by operating the system and positions;
M - MONO function activation button selecting one or more functions and
(alignment of set temperatures) compressor enabling;
modifying their parameters. Automatic
driver/passenger side; control of the manually changed rapid defrosting/demisting function;
N - AUTO function activation button functions will be suspended: the air recirculation;
(automatic operation). system will only override the settings for
heated rear window;
safety reasons.
DESCRIPTION system deactivation.
Manual selections always have higher
The automatic dual zone climate control priority than automatic settings and are CLIMATE CONTROL
system regulates the air temperatures stored until the AUTO button is SYSTEM OPERATING
in the passenger compartment in two pressed, except for cases in which the MODES
areas: driver side and passenger side. system intervenes for safety reasons. The climate control system can be
The system maintains comfort inside You can adjust one function manually activated in different ways: it is
the passenger compartment and without affecting the automatic control advisable to press the AUTO button
compensates for possible variations in of the others. The amount of air and turn the knobs to set the desired
external climate conditions. introduced into the passenger temperatures.
compartment is not affected by vehicle In this way the system operates
Note The reference temperature is speed; it is electronically controlled completely automatically to adjust the
22C for optimal comfort management. by a fan. temperature, quantity and distribution
The automatically controlled The temperature of the air sent is of the air introduced into the passenger
parameters and functions are: always automatically controlled compartment. It also manages the air
air temperature at the driver's/front according to the temperature set on the recirculation system and the activation
passenger side vents; display (except for when the system is of the air conditioning compressor.
off or in certain conditions when the
air distribution at the driver's/front
compressor is not running). 2)
passenger side vents;

29
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 30

During automatic operation, you can ADJUSTING THE AIR Air flow to the front and rear
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

change the set temperatures, air TEMPERATURE footwell diffusers. This air
distribution and fan speed at any time Turn knob A or L to the right or left to distribution setting heats the
by using the relevant buttons or knobs: adjust the air temperature: knob A passenger compartment most
the system will automatically change for the front left area, knob L for the quickly, giving a prompt sensation
the settings to adjust to the new front right area of the passenger of warmth.
requirements. compartment. The set temperatures are Air flow distributed between
During fully automatic operation shown on the displays. footwell vents (hotter air) and
(AUTO), the word AUTO will disappear Press the MONO button to align the air central and side dashboard
if the air distribution and/or flow rate temperature between the two areas. vents (cooler air). This
and/or engagement of the compressor distribution setting is useful in
Turn knob L to return to the separate spring and autumn on sunny
and/or recirculation settings are
management of air temperatures in the days.
changed.
two areas.
During fully automatic operation (FULL Air flow distributed between
Turn the knobs fully right or left to footwell diffusers and
AUTO), the word FULL will disappear
engage HI (maximum heating) or LO windscreen and front side
if the air distribution and/or flow rate
(maximum cooling) respectively. To window defrosting/demisting
and/or activation of the compressor
deactivate these functions, turn the diffusers. This distribution
and/or recirculation settings are
temperature knob to the desired setting allows the passenger
changed.
temperature. compartment to warm up
In this way the climate control system efficiently and prevents the
will continue to automatically manage SETTING THE AIR windows from misting up.
all functions except for those that have DISTRIBUTION
Air flow distribution between
been manually adjusted. The fan speed By pressing the buttons ( / / ), it windscreen demisting/
is the same in all the zones of the is possible to set one of the 7 possible defrosting diffusers and side
passenger compartment. air distributions manually: and central dashboard vents.
Air flow to the windscreen and This allows air to be sent to
front side window diffusers to the windscreen in conditions of
demist/defrost them. strong sunlight.
Air flow at central and side Air flow distribution to all
dashboard vents to ventilate the vents on the car.
chest and the face during the hot
season.

30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 31

In AUTO mode, the climate control AUTO BUTTON To restore automatic system control
system automatically manages air By pressing the AUTO button (LED on after one or more manual adjustments,
distribution (the LEDs on buttons H are button lit) the climate control system press the AUTO button.
off). When set manually, the air automatically adjusts the following
distribution is shown by the LEDs on MONO BUTTON
settings in the corresponding zones:
the selected buttons. Press the MONO button (LED on
quantity and distribution of the air
In combined function mode the relevant button lit) to align the passenger side air
introduced into the passenger
function is enabled simultaneously temperature with that of the driver
compartment;
with those already set by pressing the side.
corresponding button. If a button climate control compressor;
This function makes temperature
whose function is already active is air recirculation regulation easier when the driver is
pressed, its operation is cancelled and
cancelling any previous manual travelling alone.
the corresponding LED switches off.
settings. Turn knob L to set the passenger side
To restore automatic control of the
air distribution after a manual selection, This is indicated by the LED on the temperature and return to separate
press the AUTO button. AUTO button switching on. air temperature management.
By manually adjusting at least one of AIR RECIRCULATION AND
ADJUSTING THE FAN the functions automatically managed by
SPEED ENABLEMENT OF AQS
the system (air recirculation, air FUNCTION (Air Quality
Turn knob F to increase/decrease the distribution, fan speed or switching off System)
fan speed. The speed is indicated the air conditioner compressor), the (for versions/markets, where provided)
by the LEDs G on knob F switching on. LED will switch off, indicating that the The air recirculation is managed
maximum fan speed = all LEDs lit; climate control system is no longer according to the following operating
automatically controlling all the logics:
minimum fan speed = one LED lit. functions. automatic activation: text A on button
The fan can only be excluded if the B lit;
climate control compressor has been IMPORTANT Should the system no
switched off by pressing button C. longer be able to guarantee the forced activation (inside air
required temperature set in various recirculation always on): indicated by
IMPORTANT To restore automatic passenger compartment zones, the set the LED on button and text A
control of the fan speed after a manual temperature value will flash for a few off;
adjustment, press the AUTO button. seconds.

31
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 32

forced deactivation (air recirculation IMPORTANT With the AQS function CLIMATE CONTROL
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

always off, air drawn in from the active, after a preset time interval of the COMPRESSOR
outside): indicated by the LED on internal air recirculation system Press button C to activate/deactivate
buttons switching off and text A functioning, the climate control system the compressor (activation is indicated
on button B off. enables the intake of outside air for by the lit LED on the button). The
Forced activation/deactivation can be approximately one minute to change system remembers that the
selected by pressing button . the air in the passenger compartment. compressor has been switched off,
This takes place regardless of the even after the engine has stopped.
When the button is pressed (button pollution level of the outside air.
E off), the climate control system When the compressor is switched off
automatically activates internal air IMPORTANT The engagement of the the system deactivates air recirculation
recirculation (LED on button A recirculation system makes it possible to prevent the windows from misting
on). It is still possible to activate outside to reach the required heating/cooling up and deactivates the AQS function
air recirculation (LED on the button off) conditions faster. It is, however, (for versions/markets, where provided).
and vice versa, by pressing button inadvisable to use it on rainy/cold days In this case, although the climate
. as it would considerably increase the control system is capable of
The AQS (Air Quality System) function possibility of the windows misting maintaining the required temperature,
(for versions/markets, where provided) up inside (especially if the climate the AUTO LED switches off. The
cannot be activated when the button control system is off). When the outside temperatures will flash for a few
is pressed (LED on button E off). temperature is low, recirculation is seconds if the required temperature
forced off (air drawn in from the outside) cannot be maintained.
AQS (Air Quality System) to prevent the windows from misting
To restore automatic control of
function activation up.
compressor engagement, press again
(for versions/markets, where provided) In automatic operation, recirculation is button C or the AUTO button.
The AQS function automatically managed automatically by the system
With compressor off:
activates internal air recirculation when according to outside environmental
the outside air is polluted (e.g. in traffic conditions. if the outside temperature is higher
queues and tunnels). than the set one, the system will
IMPORTANT It is advisable not to use not be able to satisfy the request.
the air recirculation function when The temperature values will then flash
the outside temperature is low to on the display for a few seconds to
prevent the windows from rapidly indicate this;
misting up. the fan speed can be reset manually.

32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 33

With the compressor on and the engine activates the heated rear window. IMPORTANT Do not affix stickers to the
running, manual ventilation cannot be displays the fan speed (LED G lit). inside of the heated rear window over
lower than the minimum speed (only the heating filaments, to avoid damage
one LED lit). IMPORTANT The MAX-DEF function that might cause them to stop working
remains on for about 3 minutes from properly.
IMPORTANT With the compressor off, when the engine coolant reaches the
air cannot be introduced to the appropriate temperature. Thermal comfort
passenger compartment with windscreen
a temperature lower than the outside When the function is activated, the LED (for versions/markets, where provided)
temperature. Moreover, under certain on the AUTO button switches off.
Some versions feature a thermal
environmental conditions, windows With the function activated the only
comfort windscreen which, with the car
could mist up rapidly since the air is not possible manual adjustments are
exposed to the sun, reduces the
dehumidified. adjusting the fan speed and turning the
temperature in the passenger
heated rear window off.
compartment relative to the outside
RAPID WINDOW When the B, C, or AUTO buttons temperature, thus ensuring greater
DEMISTING/DEFROSTING are pressed, the climate control system
(MAX-DEF function) comfort.
will turn the MAX-DEF off.
Press the button to activate (LED
Humidity sensor
on button on) the windscreen and side HEATED REAR WINDOW (for versions/markets, where provided)
windows demisting/defrosting function. DEMISTING/DEFROSTING
The humidity sensor helps to prevent
The climate control system carries out Press the button to activate (LED the windows from misting up. For
the following operations: on button on) heated rear window full functionality, it is advisable to
demisting/defrosting.
switches on the air conditioning activate the AUTO function (LED N on).
compressor when climatic conditions This function switches off automatically When the outside temperature is low,
are suitable; after about 20 minutes or when the the system could automatically turn the
engine is turned off. It is not switched
deactivates air recirculation; compressor on and turn air recirculation
on automatically the next time the off for safer driving.
sets maximum air temperature (HI) in engine is started.
both zones;
For versions/markets where provided,
sets fan speed according to the press the button to activate
engine coolant temperature; demisting/defrosting of exterior rear
directs air flow to windscreen and view mirrors and heated nozzles (for
front side windows diffusers; versions/markets, where provided).

33
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 34

SWITCHING OFF/ON THE Switching on the climate With the Start&Stop function on (engine
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

CLIMATE CONTROL control system off at zero speed), air flow is reduced
SYSTEM to the minimum to maintain comfort
To switch on the climate control system
in fully automatic mode press the AUTO conditions inside the passenger
Switching off the
climate control system button. compartment as long as possible when
the system is in AUTO mode (LED N
Press the button (LED on button off). START&STOP on).
With climate control off: The climate control system control unit
Automatic Climate
air recirculation is on, thus isolating Control
attempts to manage the discomfort
the passenger compartment from caused by the engine stopping
the outside; The dual zone automatic climate control (compressor and engine coolant pump
manages the Start&Stop function off) but operation of the climate control
the compressor is off; (engine off when the car speed is zero) system can be enhanced by turning
the fan is off; to guarantee a suitable comfort inside the Start&Stop off by pressing the
the heated rear window can be the car. dedicated button on the dashboard.
switched on or off; Specifically, the Start&Stop function is
turned off when the weather is Note In particularly severe climate
the AQS (Air Quality System) function conditions it is recommended to limit
(for versions/markets, where particularly hot or cold to guarantee an
adequate level of comfort inside the the use of the Start&Stop function
provided) cannot be activated. to prevent the compressor from
passenger compartment; therefore, the
engine will not be stopped during continuously switching on and off, with
IMPORTANT The climate control
these transient conditions, even if the consequent rapid misting of the
system control unit stores the
speed is zero. windows and accumulation of humidity
temperatures set before the system
with unpleasant smells in the passenger
was switched off and restores them When the Start&Stop function is active compartment.
when any button of the system is (engine off at zero car speed), the
pressed (except for button D). climate control system will request Note When the Start&Stop function is
restarting of the engine if the inside on (engine off and vehicle speed zero),
temperature conditions rapidly the automatic recirculation
deteriorate (or if the user requests management is turned off always taking
maximum cooling LO or quick air in from outside, to reduce the
demisting MAX DEF). probability of window misting up (as the
compressor is off).

34
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 35

ADDITIONAL HEATER EXTERNAL LIGHTS


(for versions/markets, where provided)
This allows the passenger IN BRIEF
compartment to be heated more
quickly in cold weather conditions. The IMPORTANT
The left stalk fig. 31 operates most of
additional heater turns off automatically the external lights. The external
after the required comfort conditions 2) The climate control system lights can only be switched on when
are achieved. detects the passenger the ignition key is at MAR-ON.
compartment temperature with a
Automatic dual zone mean radiant temperature sensor The instrument panel and the
climate control system fitted in a cover under the internal dashboard and central tunnel
(for versions/markets, where provided) rear view mirror. Obstructing the controls will light up together with the
The additional heater activates field of view of this sensor with external lights.
automatically depending on the any object could cause the
environmental conditions and with climate control system to operate
with less than optimal efficiency
engine started.
.
Manual climate control
system
The additional heater activates
automatically when knob A is turned to
the end of the red section and the fan
is set to at least 1st speed. 31 A0K0556

IMPORTANT The heater only works if


DAYTIME RUNNING
the outside temperature and engine LIGHTS (DRL)
coolant temperature are low. The heater Daytime Running Lights
will not activate if the battery voltage is
With the ignition key at MAR-ON and
too low.
ring nut A fig. 31 turned to , the
daytime running lights switch on. The
other lights and interior lighting stay off.

35
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 36

IMPORTANT The daytime running lights PARKING LIGHTS When the lights are turned on by the
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

are an alternative to the dipped beam These lights can only be switched on sensor, the fog lights (for versions/
headlights for driving during the with ignition key at STOP or removed, markets, where provided) and the rear
daytime in countries where it is by moving ring nut A fig. 31 first to fog lights may be turned on.
compulsory to have lights on during the position and then to position . When the lights are automatically
day; where it is not compulsory, the switched off, the front and rear fog
use of daytime running lights is The warning light switches on
in the instrument panel. lights (if activated) are also switched off.
permitted. The next time the lights are switched
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING on automatically, the fog lights must be
IMPORTANT Daytime running lights
CONTROL (AUTOLIGHT) reactivated manually (if required).
cannot replace dipped beam headlights
(Dusk sensor)
when driving at night or through (for versions/markets, where provided) With the sensor active, it is possible to
tunnels. The use of daytime running flash the headlights but the main beam
lights is governed by the Highway Code This infrared LED sensor, combined headlights cannot be switched on. To
of the country in which you are driving. with the rain sensor and located on the activate these lights, turn the ring nut A
Comply with legal requirements. windscreen, detects the variations in to and activate the fixed dipped
outside brightness depending on the beam headlights.
SIDE LIGHTS/DIPPED light sensitivity set with the Setup
Menu: the greater the sensitivity, the When the lights have been activated
BEAM HEADLIGHTS
less external light is required to activate automatically and are then switched off
With the ignition key turned to by the sensor, the dipped beam
the external lights.
MAR-ON, turn ring nut A fig. 31 to . headlights are switched off first,
The daytime running lights are switched followed by the side lights a few
Activation
off and the side lights and dipped seconds later.
beam headlights are switched on. The The dusk sensor activates when ring
If the sensor is activated but is
warning light switches on in the nut A fig. 31 is turned to . In this
malfunctioning, the side lights and
instrument panel. way the side lights and dipped beam
dipped beam headlights are switched
headlights are activated automatically
on irrespective of the outside light
according to the external lighting
level and the sensor failure is indicated
conditions.
on the display.
IMPORTANT The sensor is unable to It is also possible to deactivate the
detect the presence of fog. Therefore sensor and switch on the side lights
under these circumstances, these lights and dipped beam headlights.
must be turned on manually.

36
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 37

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS DIRECTION INDICATORS Activation


To activate the main beam headlights, Bring the stalk to the (stable) position: With the key turned to STOP or
with ring nut A fig. 31 at , pull the upwards: activates right direction removed, pull stalk A towards the
stalk towards the steering wheel indicator; steering wheel within 2 minutes from
beyond the end of travel position. The when the engine is turned off.
warning light switches on in the downwards: activates left direction
indicator. Each time the stalk is moved, the lights
instrument panel. stay on for an extra 30 seconds up to
When the stalk is pulled towards the Warning light or will blink on the a maximum of 210 seconds; then
steering wheel again, beyond the end instrument panel. the lights are switched off automatically.
of travel position, the main beam The direction indicators are switched off Also, each time the stalk is operated,
headlights deactivate, the dipped beam automatically when the steering wheel the warning light on the
headlights reactivate and the is straightened. instrument panel switches on. The
warning light switches off. display shows the time set for the
It is not possible to switch on the main "Lane change" function function and the corresponding
beam headlights constantly if automatic If you wish to signal a lane change, graphics.
light control is active. place the left stalk in the unstable The warning light comes on when the
position for less than half a second. The lever is operated and stays on until
FLASHING direction indicator on the side selected the function is automatically
To do this, pull the stalk towards the will flash five times and then switch deactivated. Each movement of the
steering wheel (unstable position) off automatically. stalk only increases the amount of time
regardless of the position of ring nut A the lights stay on.
fig. 31. The warning light switches FOLLOW ME HOME
on in the instrument panel. DEVICE
Deactivation
This device allows you to illuminate the
REAR FOG LIGHTS Keep the stalk pulled towards the
area in front of the car for a certain
steering wheel for more than 2
For the activation and deactivation of amount of time.
seconds.
the rear fog lights, refer to the
"Controls" section.

37
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 38

EXTERNAL COURTESY AFS ADAPTIVE LIGHTS WINDOW CLEANING


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

LIGHTS (Adaptive Frontlight System)


(for versions/markets, where provided)
These light up the car and the space in IN BRIEF
front of it when the doors are unlocked. This is a system combined with Xenon
headlamps which directs the main
The right stalk controls screen
Activation light beam and adapts it to the driving
wiper/washer operation.
conditions round bends/when
When the car is parked and the doors cornering, continuously and This operates only with the ignition
are unlocked by pressing the button automatically. key turned to MAR.
on the remote control (or the luggage
compartment is unlocked by pressing The system directs the light beam to
), the dipped beam headlights, rear light up the road in the best way, taking
WINDSCREEN
side lights and number plate lights are into account the speed of the car, the WASHER/WIPER
activated. bend/corner angle and the speed of
steering. Operation 13) 14)
The lights stay on for approximately 25
seconds unless the doors and luggage The adaptive lights are automatically Ring nut A fig. 32 has the following
compartment are locked again with activated when the car is started. positions:
the remote control or the doors (or To activate/deactivate the lights use the
luggage compartment) are opened and Setup Menu (see paragraph Menu
reclosed. In these cases they switch Items in the Knowing the instrument
off after 5 seconds. panel section).
The external courtesy lights can be
enabled/disabled using the Setup Menu
(see the Menu Items paragraph in
this chapter).

32 A0K0557

O windscreen wipers off;


intermittent operation (low
speed);

38
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 39

AUTO rain sensor activation (for RAIN SENSOR The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be
versions/markets, where (for versions/markets, where provided) adjusted through the Setup menu
provided) (the windscreen wipers This is an infrared LED sensor fitted (see paragraph Menu Items in the
adapt the operating speed on the car windscreen fig. 33. Knowing the instrument panel
automatically to suit the intensity section).
of the rain) If the engine is stopped with the lever in
intermittent operation; automatic position, when it is next
continuous slow operation; started no wiping cycle will take place
continuous fast operation. even if it is raining. This prevents
accidental activation of the rain sensor
Move the stalk upwards (unstable
when the engine is started (e.g. when
position) to limit operation to the time
the windscreen is being washed by
for which the stalk is held in this
hand or the wipers are stuck to the
position. When released, the stalk will
windscreen when there is ice).
return to its default position and the 33 A0K0558
wiper will be automatically stopped. To restore automatic operation of the
It is able to detect the presence of rain rain sensor, turn the ring nut on the
"Smart washing" and consequently manage windscreen right stalk A fig. 32 from automatic
function wiping in accordance with the amount position (AUTO) to O position and then
of water on the windscreen. turn A ring nut back to the AUTO
Pull the lever towards the steering
position.
wheel (unstable position) to operate the
windscreen washer. Keep the stalk Activation When the rain sensor is reactivated
pulled for more than half a second to using any of the manoeuvres described
The sensor is activated when ring nut A
operate the windscreen washer jet and above, reactivation is indicated by a
fig. 32 is turned to automatic position
wiper automatically with a single single stroke of the windscreen wipers,
(AUTO control): the windscreen wiper
movement. regardless of the condition of the
stroke frequency is thus adjusted in
windscreen.
The wiper stops working three strokes accordance with the amount of water
after the stalk is released. A further on the windscreen. If the sensitivity is changed whilst the
stroke after approximately 6 seconds rain sensor is operating, a windscreen
This frequency can vary from no stroke
completes the cycle. wiper stroke is carried out to confirm
(no rain - windscreen dry) up to the
the change.
2nd constant speed operation (heavy
rain - windscreen wet).

39
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 40

In the event of malfunction of the rain With reverse gear engaged and CRUISE CONTROL
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

sensor whilst it is active, the windscreen wiper on, the rear window (for versions/markets, where provided)
windscreen wiper operates wiper is activated in continuous mode.
intermittently at a speed consistent with Pushing the stalk towards the IN BRIEF
the sensitivity setting of the rain sensor, dashboard (unstable position) will
regardless of whether there is rain on activate the rear window washer jet.
the glass (sensor failure is indicated on This is an electronically controlled
Keep the stalk pushed for more than driving assistance device that allows
the display). half a second to activate the rear the desired car speed to be
The sensor continues to operate and it window wiper as well. Releasing the maintained, without having to press
is possible to set the windscreen wiper stalk will activate the smart washing the accelerator pedal. This device
to continuous mode (1st or 2nd speed). function, as described for the can be used at a speed above
The failure indication remains for as windscreen wiper. 30 km/h on long stretches of dry,
long as the sensor is active. straight roads with few variations
(e.g. motorways).
REAR WINDOW
WASHER/WIPER The use of this device on extra-urban
(for versions/markets, where provided) roads with traffic is not therefore
WARNING recommended. Do not use it in town.
Activation
This operates only with the ignition key
13) Do not use the screen wiper to TURNING THE DEVICE
turned to MAR.
remove layers of snow or ice ON
Turn ring nut B fig. 32 from position O from the windscreen. In such
to position to operate the rear conditions, the windscreen wiper Turn ring nut A fig. 34 to ON.
window wiper as follows: may be subjected to excessive
stress and the motor cut-out
in intermittent mode when the
switch, which prevents operation
windscreen wiper is not operating;
for a few seconds, may intervene.
in synchronous mode (at half the If operation is not restored (even
speed of the windscreen wiper) when after restarting that car with the
the windscreen wiper is operating; key), contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership.
in continuous mode with reverse gear
engaged and the control active. 14) Do not operate the windscreen
wiper with the blades lifted from
the windscreen. 34 A0K0559

40
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 41

The device cannot be engaged in 1st or RESTORING THE REDUCING THE


reverse gear: it is advisable to engage MEMORISED SPEED MEMORISED SPEED
it in 5th gear or higher. If the device has been disengaged by This can be done in two ways:
When travelling downhill with the device pressing the brake or clutch pedal, the by deactivating the device and then
engaged, the car may slightly exceed stored speed can be reset as follows: storing the new speed
the stored speed. accelerate gradually until a speed or
The warning light and, for approaching the one stored is
reached; by moving the stalk downwards ()
versions/markets, where provided,
until the new speed, which will be
message on the display are switched engage the gear selected at the time stored automatically, is reached.
on to indicate activation. that the speed was stored;
Each movement of the lever
STORING THE CAR press the RES button (B fig. 34). corresponds to a slight reduction in
SPEED speed of about 1 km/h, while keeping
INCREASING THE
Proceed as follows: MEMORISED SPEED the stalk held downwards will decrease
the speed continuously.
turn ring nut A fig. 34 to ON and This can be done in two ways:
press the accelerator to reach the
by pressing the accelerator and TURNING THE DEVICE
required speed; OFF
storing the new speed reached
move the stalk upwards (+) for at The device can be deactivated in the
or
least 1 second, then release it: the following ways:
car speed is now stored and you can by moving the stalk upwards (+) until
the new speed, which will be stored by turning ring nut A fig. 34 to the
therefore release the accelerator.
automatically, is reached. OFF position
If needed (when overtaking for
Each movement of the stalk by switching off the engine;
instance), you can accelerate simply by
pressing the accelerator; when you corresponds to an increase in speed of
release the pedal, the car goes back to about 1 km/h, while keeping the stalk
the speed stored previously. held upwards will continuously increase
the speed.

41
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 42

by pressing the brake pedal, the ROOF LIGHTS IMPORTANT Before getting out of the
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

clutch or the accelerator; in this car, make sure that both switches are in
last case the system is not effectively FRONT ROOF LIGHT the central position: when the doors
deactivated but the system gives are closed the lights will switch off
Switch A fig. 35 switches the roof lights
priority to the acceleration request. to avoid draining the battery.
on/off.
The device still remains active, In any case, if the switch is left
without the need to press the RES inadvertently in the permanently on
button to return to the previous position, the roof light will turn off
conditions once acceleration automatically 15 minutes after the
is concluded. engine stopping.

Automatic deactivation ROOF LIGHT TIMING


The device deactivates automatically in On certain versions, to facilitate getting
the following cases: in/out of the car at night or in poorly-lit
if the ABS or ESC systems intervene; areas, two timed modes have been
35 A0K0805 provided.
with the car speed below the set
limit;
A switch positions: Timing when getting into
in the event of system failure. the car
central position: lights C and E switch
15) 16) on/off when the doors are opened/ The roof lights switch on according to
closed; the following modes:
pressed to the left (position OFF): for about 10 seconds when the
lights C and E are always switched doors are unlocked;
off; for about 3 minutes when one of the
WARNING
pressed to the right (position ): doors is opened;
lights C and E are always switched for about 10 seconds when the
15) When travelling with the device
on. doors are closed.
active, do not move the gear lever
to neutral. Lights switch on/off progressively. The timed period is interrupted when
16) In the event of device faults or Switch B switches light C on/off. the ignition key is turned to MAR.
failures, turn the ring nut A to
Switch D switches light E on/off.
OFF and contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership.

42
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 43

Timing when getting out The light will stay on for a few seconds LUGGAGE
of the car after the doors are closed and will COMPARTMENT ROOF
then switch off automatically. The light LIGHT
After removing the key from the ignition
switch, the roof lights switch on as switches off in any case when the This is located on the left side of the
follows: ignition key is turned to MAR. luggage compartment fig. 38.
within 2 minutes of the engine being IMPORTANT The light switches off
switched off for a period of around automatically after a few minutes if a
10 seconds; door is left open. To switch it on again,
for about 3 minutes when one of the open another door or close and reopen
doors is opened; the same door.
for about 10 seconds when one of
COURTESY LIGHTS
the doors is closed. (for versions/markets, where provided)
The timing stops automatically when Two courtesy roof lights B fig. 37 are
the doors are locked. present behind the sun visors. 38 A0K0563

REAR ROOF LIGHT This switches on automatically when


Press the cover A fig. 36 to switch the the luggage compartment is opened
light on/off. and switches off when it is closed.
The light switches on/off regardless of
the ignition key position.

37 A0K0562

Lift cover A to turn the lights on.

36 A0K0561

43
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 44

CONTROLS FOG LIGHTS


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

GLOVE COMPARTMENT
LIGHT (for versions/markets, where provided)
This light comes on automatically when HAZARD WARNING
LIGHTS Operation
the glove compartment is opened
and switches off when it is closed. Press button fig. 41 to switch the
Operation lights on/off.
The light switches on/off regardless of Press switch A fig. 40 to switch the
the ignition key position. lights on/off.

41 A0K0609

39 A0K0564
40 A0K0622 With the lights on, warning light in
Warning lights and on the the instrument panel switches on.
instrument panel switch on and switch REAR FOG LIGHTS
A flashes when the lights are on.
Operation
Emergency braking Press button fig. 41 to switch the
lights on/off.
In the event of emergency braking the
hazard warning lights are lit up The rear fog lights are only switched on
automatically as well as the and with the dipped headlights or front
warning lights in the panel. fog lights on.
The lights switch off automatically when Press the button again to switch the
emergency braking ceases. lights off, or switch off the dipped
headlights or the front fog lights (for
17)
versions/markets, where provided).
With the lights on, warning light in
44 the instrument panel switches on.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 45

CENTRAL LOCKING The intervention of the system is


indicated by a message shown on the
Operation display.
Press the fig. 42 button to lock all Carefully check the car for fuel leaks, for
doors at the same time. instance in the engine compartment, WARNING
under the car or near the tank area.
18) 17) The use of hazard warning lights
After a collision, turn the ignition key to is governed by the Highway Code
STOP to prevent the battery from of the country you are driving in:
comply with legal requirements.
running down.
18) If, after an impact, you smell fuel
To restore the correct operation of the or notice leaks from the fuel
car, proceed as follows: system, do not reactivate the
turn the ignition key to the MAR-ON system to avoid the risk of fire.
position;
42 A0K0588
activate the right direction indicator;
deactivate the right direction
Locking takes place irrespective of the
indicator;
position of the ignition key.
activate the left direction indicator;
FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM deactivate the left direction indicator;
Operation activate the right direction indicator;
This intervenes in the case of an impact deactivate the right direction
causing: indicator;
the interruption of the fuel supply with activate the left direction indicator;
the engine consequently cutting out; deactivate the left direction indicator;
the automatic unlocking of the doors; turn the ignition key to the STOP
the interior lights being switched on. position;
turn the ignition key to the MAR-ON
position.

45
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 46

INTERIOR FITTINGS FRONT ARMREST


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

(for versions/markets, where provided)


STORAGE This is located between the front seats.
COMPARTMENTS To bring it to its standard use position,
19) push it downwards.
The front armrest is equipped with an
Upper compartment inner storage compartment.
Operate in the point shown by the To access the compartment, position
arrow to open the compartment A fig. the armrest in the standard use
44 A0K0566
43. configuration (fully down) and then lift
On some versions the compartments the cover with lining A fig. 46.
may be heated/cooled by an air vent
connected to the climate control
system (operate wheel A fig. 45 to
adjust the air flow rate in the lower
compartment).

43 A0K0565

46 A0K0568
Passenger side glove
compartment
For correct use of the armrest specific
Operate handle A fig. 44 to open the measures must be followed for the
compartment. opening of the cover:
When the compartment is opened, a 45 A0K0567
it must be opened only with armrest
courtesy light switches on. completely lowered;
In versions with dual-zone automatic
There is a document holder inside the to prevent content of the armrest
compartment and an eyewear holder climate control system, the glove
from falling, the opening of the cover
on the rear of the flap. compartment is set to the same
is inhibited in positions other than
temperature as the passenger's side.
"completely lowered".

46
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 47

NOTE During the armrest tilting stage Two B cup or can holders are obtained POWER SOCKETS
(complete tilting upwards or in the armrest. To use these, pull tab These are located on the central tunnel
downwards), make sure the cover with C in the direction shown by the arrow. fig. 49 and on the left side of the
lining is always closed correctly. A storage compartment is available luggage compartment fig. 50 (for
inside the armrest; this can be versions/markets, where provided).
REAR ARMREST
(for versions/markets, where provided) accessed by raising the flap. They only operate with the ignition key
at MAR-ON.
To use armrest A fig. 47, lower it as SKI COMPARTMENT
shown in the figure. (for versions/markets, where provided)
The compartment may be used for
carrying long loads.
To access the compartment, lower the
rear armrest and then press device A
fig. 48 to lower flap B.

49 A0K0610

48 A0K0570

50 A0K0571

47 A0K0569
If you request the smokers' kit, the
socket on the central tunnel is replaced
with a cigar lighter (see following
paragraph).

47
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 48

IMPORTANT Do not connect devices ASHTRAY SUN VISORS


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

with power higher than 180 W to the The ashtray is a removable spring- These are located at the sides of the
socket. Do not damage the socket by loaded plastic box that can be fitted interior rear view mirror. They can be
using unsuitable adaptors. into the glass/can holder on the central adjusted forwards and sideways.
tunnel fig. 52. 21)
A courtesy mirror with light is fitted
CIGAR LIGHTER
behind the visors. The light allows to
This is located on the central tunnel.
use the mirror in poor visibility
Press button A fig. 51 to activate the
conditions.
cigar lighter.

52 A0K0573

MONEY HOLDER
(for versions/markets, where provided)
54 A0K0574
51 A0K0572
On some versions a money holder is
present on the central tunnel fig. 53. Lift cover A fig. 54 to access the mirror.
After a few seconds the button goes
back to its initial position and the cigar IMPORTANT On both sides of the
lighter is ready for use. 20) passenger side sun visor there is a label
IMPORTANT Always check that the remembering that it is compulsory to
cigar lighter has switched off. deactivate the airbags if a rearward
facing child restraint system is fitted.
IMPORTANT Do not connect devices Always comply with the instructions on
with power higher than 180 W to the the sun visor (see the "Front airbag"
socket. Do not damage the socket by paragraph in chapter "Safety").
using unsuitable adaptors.
53 A0K0808

48
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 49

EXTINGUISHER ELECTRIC SUN


(for versions/markets, where provided) ROOF
This is located under the front (for versions/markets, where provided)
passenger seat fig. 55.
WARNING The sun roof comprises two glass
panels; the front one is mobile and the
rear one fixed. These feature two sun
19) Do not travel with the storage blinds (front and rear) that can be
compartments open: they may
moved manually.
injure the front seat occupants in
the event of an accident. With the roof closed, the blinds can be
20) The cigar lighter reaches high placed in any position.
temperatures Handle it carefully
and make sure that children do OPERATION
not use it: risk of fire and/or The sun roof can be operated only with
55 A0K0575 burns. the ignition key turned to MAR-ON.
21) Do not use the ashtray as a Controls A and B fig. 56 on the panel
NOTE On some versions, the waste paper basket: it may catch next to the front roof light control sun
extinguisher is located on the right side fire in contact with cigarette roof opening/closing.
of the luggage compartment inside a stubs.
suitable container.

56 A0K0576

49
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 50

Roof opening ANTI-PINCH SAFETY INITIALISATION


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

DEVICE PROCEDURE
Press and hold down button A fig. 56:
the front glass panel will move into The sun roof has an anti-pinch safety After the battery has been
the spoiler position. Press button A system capable of detecting the disconnected or a fuse has blown, the
again and keep it pressed for more than presence of an obstacle whilst the roof operation of the sun roof must be
half a second to automatically move is closing; when this happens, the initialised again.
the sun roof to an intermediate position system stops and the movement of the Proceed as follows:
(Comfort position). front glass is immediately reversed.
press button B fig. 56 until the roof is
If button A fig. 56 is pressed again for SUN BLINDS completely closed. Then release the
more than half a second, the roof button;
will automatically continue until it To open the blinds, grip handle A fig.
57, following the direction indicated by press button B and hold it down for
reaches end of travel position. The front
the arrow until the desired position is at least 10 seconds and/or until the
glass panel can be stopped in an
reached. glass panel clicks forwards. Release
intermediate position by pressing the
the button at this point;
button again.
within 5 seconds of the previous
3)
operation, press button B and hold it
22)
down: the front glass panel will
complete a full opening and closing
Closing the sun roof
cycle. Only release the button at
With the roof in the fully open position, the end of this cycle.
press button B fig. 56: if the button
is operated for more than half a MAINTENANCE/
second, the front roof glass will EMERGENCY
automatically assume the intermediate 57 A0K0577
In the event of emergency or
position (Comfort position). maintenance, the roof can be moved
To close them, carry out the procedure manually when there is no power
If the button is operated again for about
in reverse. supply (opening/closing of the front
half a second the roof will assume the
spoiler position. Lastly, if closing button glass panel) by carrying out the
B is pressed again, the roof will move following operations:
to completely closed position. remove the protective cap A fig. 58
located on the internal lining,
between the two sun blinds;

50
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 51

DOORS
DOOR CENTRAL
LOCKING/UNLOCKING
WARNING
Locking from the
outside
22) When leaving the car, always
remove the key from the ignition With the doors closed, press the
to avoid the risk of injury due button on the key (or on the
58 A0K0578 to accidental operation of the dashboard fig. 59)or fit and then turn
sunroof. Improper use of the roof the metal insert (located inside the key)
take the Allen key B supplied, which can be dangerous. Before and in the driver side door lock.
is located in the on-board during operation, always check
documentation container or in the that no one is exposed to the risk
tool container in the luggage of being injured by the moving
compartment; sun roof or by objects getting
caught or hit by it.
introduce the key into housing C and
turn it clockwise to open the roof or
anticlockwise to close the roof.

59 A0K0588

The door locking function is operated:


IMPORTANT
with all the doors closed;
3) Do not open the sun roof if there with all the doors closed and the
is snow or ice on it: you may luggage compartment open:
damage it.

51
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 52

Door unlocking from the EMERGENCY DOOR


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

outside LOCKING DEVICE


Press the button on the key or turn
Front passenger side
the metal insert (located inside the key) door
in the driver side door lock.
The front passenger side door has a
Door locking/unlocking device to lock it when there is no
from the inside current.
Press button fig. 59 on the To lock it, fit the metal insert of the
dashboard. ignition key in the housing A fig. 61 and
move it upwards.
IMPORTANT With central locking
active, pulling the internal opening lever
of the passenger side door unlocks
the door itself. Pulling the internal
opening lever of the driver side door
activates central unlocking.

IMPORTANT The rear doors cannot be


opened from the inside when the child
lock device is engaged. 60 A0K0579

In the absence of electrical power 61 A0K0580


position 1 - device engaged (door
supply (e.g. blown fuse, battery locked);
disconnected, etc.) it is still possible to Rear doors
lock the doors manually. position 2 - device not engaged (door The rear doors are fitted with an
may be opened from the inside). emergency device that allows the doors
CHILD SAFETY DEVICE The device remains engaged even if the to be locked when there is no current.
This prevents the rear doors from being doors are unlocked remotely. 4) 5)
In this case, proceed as described
opened from the inside. below:
IMPORTANT The rear doors cannot be
Device A fig. 60 can only be engaged opened from the inside when the child fit the metal insert of the ignition key
with the doors open: lock device is engaged. into housing B;
turn the key anticlockwise and then
remove it from housing B.
52
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 53

The door lock knob can be realigned ELECTRIC WINDOWS


(only when the battery charge has been
restored) as follows: These operate when the ignition key is
turned to MAR-ON and for about 3
press button on the key;
IMPORTANT minutes after turning the key to STOP
press the locking/unlocking button or removing it if one of the front doors is
on the dashboard; open.
4) Always use this device when
opening the door by inserting the key carrying children. The buttons are located in the door
in the front door pawl; 5) After engaging the device on both panel trim fig. 62 (the driver side door
operate the internal door handle. rear doors, check for proper panel can be used to operate all the
engagement by trying to open a windows).
6)
rear door with the internal handle. An anti-pinch device operates when the
Opening/closing 6) If the child lock was engaged and front and rear windows are raised.
mechanism initialisation the previously described locking
23)
procedure carried out, operating
If the battery is disconnected or the
the internal opening handle will
protection fuse blows, the door CONTROLS
not open the door, just the
opening/closing mechanism must be
realignment of the lock knob. To
initialised as follows: Driver side front door
open the door, pull the external fig. 62
close all the doors; handle. The door central
A: front left window opening/closing;
locking/unlocking button is not
press the button on the key or the continuous automatic operation
disabled by the engagement of
button on the dashboard; during window opening/closing
the emergency lock.
press the button on the key or the stage;
button on the dashboard. B: front right window opening/
closing; continuous automatic
operation during window
opening/closing stage;
C: enabling/disabling of rear door
electric window controls;

53
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 54

Window opening Anti-crush safety device


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Push the buttons to open the desired The car is equipped with an anti-crush
window. function for the raising of the front
When one of the two buttons is and rear windows.
pressed briefly, the window moves in This safety system detects the
"stages"; if the button is held down, presence of an obstacle during the
"continuous automatic" operation window closing travel and intervenes by
is activated. stopping and reversing the window
If the control button is pressed again, travel, depending on its position. This
the window will stop in the desired device is also useful if the windows are
position. If the button is held down for activated accidentally by children on
several seconds, the window raises board the car.
or lowers automatically (only with The anti-crush safety function is active
ignition key in MAR position). both during the manual and the
automatic operation of the window.
Window closing When the anti-crush system is
activated, the window travel is
Lift the buttons to close the desired
immediately interrupted and then
window.
reversed. The window cannot
62 A0K0581 The window closing stage occurs be operated in any way during this
following the same logics described for time.
D: rear left window opening/closing the opening stage.
(for versions/markets where IMPORTANT If the anti-crush protection
provided); continuous automatic Front and rear intervenes 5 consecutive times within
operation during window passenger doors a minute or is faulty, the automatic
opening/closing stage (for versions/markets, where provided) closing operation of the window
E: rear right window opening/closing On the passenger side front door is inhibited, only allowing it in steps of
(for versions/markets, where control panel, and on some versions half a second with the button released
provided); continuous automatic also on the rear doors, buttons F fig. 62 for the subsequent manoeuvre.
operation during window are provided to control the associated In order to restore the correct operation
opening/closing stage. windows. of the system, the relevant window
must be lowered.

54
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 55

IMPORTANT With ignition key at STOP For versions/markets where provided,


or removed, the electric windows after there has been no power supply
remain active for about 3 minutes and for the control units (battery replaced or
are deactivated when a door is opened. disconnected or protection fuses for
WARNING the electric window control units
IMPORTANT With the anti-crush replaced), the automatic operation of
system, when the button on the the windows must be restored.
23) Incorrect use of the electric
remote control is pressed for longer windows may be dangerous. The restoration procedure must be
than 2 seconds the windows will open, Before and during their operation, performed as described below with the
whilst if the button is pressed for ensure that any passengers are doors closed:
longer than 2 seconds the windows will not at risk from the moving glass
close. either by personal objects getting completely open the driver's door
caught in the mechanism or by window keeping the operating button
being hit by it directly. When pressed for at least three seconds
leaving the car, always remove after the (lower) end of travel position
the key from the ignition to is reached;
prevent accidental operation of completely raise the driver side
the electric windows from being a window and hold the button down for
IMPORTANT
hazard for those still on board. at least 3 seconds once the (upper)
7) The system conforms to the end of travel position has been
Electric window system reached;
2000/4/EC standard concerning initialisation
the safety of passengers leaning proceed in the same way as
out of the passenger The system must be re-initialised after
described in points 1 and 2 for the
compartment. disconnecting the battery or if the
passenger side door;
relevant protection fuse is blown.
make sure that the initialisation is
Initialisation procedure:
correct by checking that the windows
fully close the window to initialise work automatically.
manually;
after the window has reached the
upper end of travel, hold the up
button pressed for at least one
second.

55
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 56

LUGGAGE Emergency opening


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

COMPARTMENT from the inside


To carry out the emergency opening
The luggage compartment unlocking is from the inside of the car, remove
electrically operated and is deactivated the rear seat head restraints,
when the car is in motion. completely fold down the rear seats
(see paragraph Extending the luggage
OPENING
compartment), then press on lever A
When unlocked, the luggage fig. 64.
compartment can be opened from 65 A0K0584

outside the car by pressing the electric


logo fig. 63 until a click, which indicates LUGGAGE
unlocking, is heard or by pressing the COMPARTMENT
button on the key. INITIALISATION
IMPORTANT If the battery is
disconnected or the protection fuse
blows, the luggage compartment
opening/closing mechanism must be
initialised as follows:
64 A0K0583
close all the doors and the luggage
CLOSING compartment;

Lower the tailgate, pressing near the Press button on the key;
lock until you hear it click into place. Press button on the key.
63 A0K0068
There are handles A fig. 65 inside
The direction indicators will blink twice the tailgate to allow it to be closed more
and an internal light will switch on when easily.
the luggage compartment is opened:
IMPORTANT Before closing the
the light will go out automatically when
luggage compartment make sure that
the luggage compartment is closed.
you have the keys since the luggage
The light switches off automatically after
compartment is automatically locked.
a few minutes if the luggage
compartment is left open.

56
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 57

EXTENDING THE Removing the parcel


LUGGAGE shelf
COMPARTMENT
Proceed as follows:
The luggage compartment can be
partially (1/3 or 2/3) or totally extended
by splitting the rear seat.
See the descriptions in Removing the
parcel shelf and Folding back the
seats paragraphs for how to expand
the luggage compartment. 67 A0K0585

after removal, the parcel shelf can be


loaded sideways into the luggage
compartment or placed between the
front seat backrests and the
folded-back rear seat cushions (with
the luggage compartment completely
expanded).

Folding the seats


Proceed as follows:
raise the headrests to the maximum
height, press both buttons A and B
66 A0K0586 fig. 68 to the side of the two
supports, then remove the head
free the ends of the two parcel shelf restraints by sliding them upwards;
B mounting links A fig. 66 by
move the seat belts to the side,
removing the eyelets C from the
making sure that they are correctly
mounting pins;
extended and not twisted;
free the pins A fig. 67 outside the
shelf then remove the parcel shelf
B sliding it outwards.

57
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 58

Repositioning the rear


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

seat
Move the seat belts to the side, making
sure that they are correctly extended
and not twisted.
Raise the previously folded backrest
until you hear the click of the locking
mechanism, visually checking that the
red band on lever A fig. 69 has
68 A0K0625
disappeared. The red band indicates
that the backrest is not secured.
raise lever A fig. 69 to fold the left or
Finally, reposition the head restraints,
right side of the backrest and then
inserting them correctly into their
guide the backrest onto the cushion
housings.
(when lever A is raised, you will
see a red band B).
SECURING YOUR LOAD
The luggage compartment contains
two attachments A fig. 70 for the
cables that secure the load transported
70 A0K0589
and another two attachments are
located on the rear crossmember B.
24) 25)
LUGGAGE RETAINING
NET
IMPORTANT Every attachment has a (for versions/markets, where provided)
maximum load capacity of 100 kg. This is useful for correctly arranging
the load and/or for transporting light
69 A0K0628 BAG HOOKS materials. The luggage retaining net is
There are also bag hooks inside the available from Lineaccessori Alfa
luggage compartment. Romeo.

58
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 59

BONNET CLOSING
Lower the bonnet to approximately 20
OPENING centimetres from the engine
Proceed as follows: compartment then let it drop. Make
WARNING sure that the bonnet is completely
pull lever A fig. 71 in the direction
closed and not only fastened by the
indicated by the arrow;
24) A heavy load that has not been locking device by trying to open it. If it is
secured may cause serious operate lever B, in the direction not perfectly closed, do not try to
injuries to passengers in the event indicated by the arrow, and raise the press the bonnet down but open it and
of an accident. bonnet. repeat the procedure. 26) 27)
25) If you are travelling in an area
with limited opportunities for IMPORTANT Always check that the
refuelling and you wish to bring bonnet is closed correctly to prevent it
petrol with you in a petrol can, you from opening while the car is travelling.
must do so in compliance with The following plate is applied inside
current regulations and using an the engine compartment fig. 72:
approved can, appropriately
secured to the load securing
attachments. However, the risks
of fire in case of collision increase
anyway. 71 A0K0607

IMPORTANT Two side gas shock


absorbers are provided to assist in
opening the bonnet. Do not tamper
with the shock absorber and
accompany the bonnet while lifting it. 72 A0K2012

IMPORTANT Before raising the bonnet,


make sure that the arms of the wipers
are not raised from the windscreen and
that the wiper is not operational.

59
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 60

ROOF RACK/SKI
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

RACK
The attachments A are located in the
WARNING areas illustrated in the figure and can WARNING
only be accessed with the doors open.
26) For safety reasons, the bonnet 28) 29) 28) After travelling for a few
must always be properly closed 8) 9) kilometres, check to ensure that
while driving. Therefore, make the fixing screws for the
sure that the bonnet is properly attachments are well tightened.
closed and that the lock is 29) Evenly distribute the load and
engaged. If you discover that the take into account, when driving,
bonnet is not perfectly closed the increased responsiveness
during travel, stop immediately of the car to side wind.
and close the bonnet in the
correct manner.
27) Perform these operations only
when the car is stationary.
73 A0K0590
IMPORTANT
Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo includes a
dedicated roof rack/ski rack for this car. 8) Never exceed the maximum
permitted loads (see Technical
specifications section).
9) The size of the loads you
transport must strictly comply
with currently applicable
regulations.

60
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 61

HEADLIGHTS ADJUSTING THE


HEADLIGHTS ABROAD
LIGHT BEAM DIRECTION The dipped headlights are aligned to
The correct orientation of the headlights comply with the regulations of the
is important for the driver's comfort country of purchase. When travelling in
and safety as well as for all other road countries with opposite driving
users. This is also covered by a specific direction, to avoid dazzling the drivers
rule of the highway code. on the other side of the road, you need
to cover areas of the headlight
The headlights must be correctly 74 A0K0541 according to the Highway code of the
directed to ensure the best visibility country you are travelling in.
conditions for all drivers. Contact a Alfa Position 3 : driver + maximum permitted
Romeo Dealership to have the load stowed in the luggage
headlights checked and adjusted, if compartment.
necessary.
IMPORTANT Check the alignment
HEADLIGHT ALIGNMENT every time that the load carried
CORRECTOR changes.
This device works with the ignition key
in the MAR position and the dipped IMPORTANT If the car is equipped with
headlights on. Bixenon headlights, the headlight
alignment is controlled electronically, as
Headlight alignment a consequence the and buttons
adjustment are not present.
To adjust, press the and fig. 74
FOG LIGHT ALIGNMENT
buttons. The adjustment position is (for versions/markets, where provided)
shown on the display.
Contact a Alfa Romeo Dealership to
Position 0 : one or two occupants in the
have the headlights checked and
front seats.
adjusted, if necessary.
Position 1 : 4 people.
Position 2 : 4 people + load in luggage
compartment.

61
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 62

ESC SYSTEM The ESC system also includes the EBD SYSTEM
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

following systems: The EBD system is an integral part of


IN BRIEF EBD the ESC system and intervenes during
ABS braking, distributing the brake force
The ESC system improves the optimally between front and rear
CBC wheels.
directional control and stability of the
car in various driving conditions. ASR This guarantees greater braking stability
The ESC system corrects the cars HILL HOLDER for the car, preventing sudden locking
understeer and oversteer, distributing of the rear wheels and the consequent
HBA
the brake force on the appropriate instability of the car.
wheels. The torque supplied by MSR
the engine can also be reduced in DST ABS
order to maintain control of the car. ELECTRONIC Q2 (E-Q2) This system, which is an integral part of
the braking system, prevents one or
30) 31) 32) 33) 34)
"PRE-FILL" (RAB - Ready Alert more wheels from locking and slipping
Brake) in all road surface conditions,
The ESC system uses sensors installed irrespective of the intensity of the
SYSTEM ACTIVATION
on the car to determine the trajectory braking action, ensuring that the car
that the driver intends to follow and The ESC system switches on can be controlled even during
compares it with the cars effective automatically when the engine is emergency braking and optimising
trajectory. When the real trajectory started and cannot be switched off. stopping distances.
deviates from the desired trajectory, the The system intervenes when braking
SYSTEM INTERVENTION
ESC system intervenes to counter the and the wheels are about to lock,
cars understeer or oversteer. This is indicated by the flashing of the typically in emergency braking or
warning light on the instrument low-grip conditions, when locking may
Oversteer: occurs when the car is
panel, to inform the driver that the car is be more frequent.
turning more than it should according
in critical stability and grip conditions.
to the angle of the steering wheel. The system also improves control and
Understeer: occurs when the car is stability of the car when braking on a
turning less than it should according surface where the grip of the left and
to the angle of the steering wheel. right wheels varies, or on corners.

62
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 63

System intervention if the slipping involves both drive When setting off, the ESC system
A slight pulsing of the brake pedal and wheels, the ASR system intervenes, control unit maintains the braking
noise indicates the intervention of the reducing the power transmitted by pressure on the wheels until the engine
ABS: this is completely normal when the engine; torque necessary for starting is
the system intervenes. if the slipping only involves one of the reached, or in any case for a maximum
drive wheels, it also intervenes of 2 seconds, allowing your right foot
35) 36) 37) 38) 39) 40) 41) to be moved easily from the brake
automatically, braking the wheel that
is slipping. pedal to the accelerator.
CBC (Cornering Brake
Control) SYSTEM When two seconds have elapsed,
System intervention without starting, the system is
The system acts when braking on
automatically deactivated, gradually
corners, optimising the distribution of This is indicated by the flashing of the
releasing the braking pressure. During
brake pressure on the four wheels: the warning light on the instrument
this release stage it is possible to hear a
system prevents the wheels on the panel, to inform the driver that the car is
typical mechanical brake release noise,
inside of the corner (less affected by the in critical stability and grip conditions.
indicating the imminent movement of
weight of the car) from locking,
HILL HOLDER SYSTEM the car.
ensuring better stability and direction
for the car. This is an integral part of the ESC IMPORTANT The Hill Holder system is
system and facilitates starting on not a parking brake; therefore, never
ASR (Anti-Slip slopes, activating automatically in the
Regulation) SYSTEM leave the car without having engaged
following cases: the handbrake, turned the engine
42) 43) 44) off and engaged first gear, so that it is
uphill: car stationary on a road with a
This is an integral part of the ESC gradient higher than 5%, engine parked in safe conditions (for further
system and automatically operates in running, brake pressed and gearbox information read the "Parking"
the event of one or both drive wheels in neutral or gear (other than reverse) paragraph in the "Starting and driving"
slipping, loss of grip on wet roads engaged; chapter).
(aquaplaning) and acceleration
on slippery, snowy or icy roads, etc. downhill: car stationary on a road
with a gradient higher than 5%,
Depending on the slipping conditions, engine running, brake pressed and
two different control systems are reverse gear engaged.
activated:

63
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 64

IMPORTANT There may be situations The HBA system is deactivated when ELECTRONIC Q2
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

on small gradients (less than 8%), the brake pedal is released. SYSTEM (E-Q2)
with car laden, in which the Hill Holder The "Electronic Q2" system intervenes
system may not activate, causing a MSR (Motor during acceleration on corners, braking
slight reversing motion and increasing Schleppmoment
Regelung) SYSTEM the inner drive wheel and thus
the risk of collision with another vehicle increasing the traction of the outer
or object. The driver is, in any case, This system is an integral part of the wheel (which bears more of the cars
responsible for safe driving. ABS, that intervenes, if there is a weight): the torque is thus distributed
sudden downshifting, restoring torque optimally between the drive wheels
HBA (Hydraulic Brake to the engine, thereby preventing in accordance with the driving
Assist) SYSTEM excessive drive at the drive wheels conditions and road surface, permitting
45) 46) 47) which, especially in poor grip particularly effective, sporty driving.
The HBA system is designed to conditions, could lead to a loss in
improve the car's braking capacity stability of the car. "PRE-FILL" SYSTEM
during emergency braking. The system (RAB - Ready Alert
DST SYSTEM (Dynamic Brake)
detects emergency braking by Steering Torque) (only with 'Dynamic" mode activated)
monitoring the speed and force with
which the brake pedal is pressed, and This function integrates Dual Pinion This function activates automatically
consequently applies the optimal brake active steering into the operation of if the accelerator pedal is released
pressure. This can reduce the braking ESC. For particular manoeuvres, the rapidly, reducing the brake pad travel
distance: the HBA system therefore ESC system controls the steering (both at front and back), with the aim of
completes the ABS. to actuate a steering torque and assist preparing the braking system and
the driver in the best possible way. enhancing its responsiveness, thus
Maximum assistance from the HBA reducing the stopping distance in the
system is obtained by pressing the The system operates the brakes and
event of subsequent braking.
brake pedal very quickly. In addition, steering in a coordinated manner to
the brake pedal should be pressed increase the suspension and safety
continuously during braking, avoiding level of the car as a whole. The steering
intermittent presses, to get the most provides additional torque on the
out of the system. steering wheel.

Do not reduce pressure on the brake


pedal until braking is not necessary
anymore.

64
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 65

35) When the ABS intervenes and 41) For the correct operation of the
you feel the brake pedal pulsating, ABS, the tyres must of necessity
do not reduce the pressure, but be the same make and type on all
hold it down firmly and wheels, in perfect condition and,
WARNING confidently; in doing so you will above all, of the prescribed type
brake in the shortest distance and dimensions.
possible, depending on the 42) The ASR system cant overrule
30) The ESC system cant alter the
current road conditions. the natural laws of physics, and
natural laws of physics, and cant
increase grip which depends on 36) For maximum efficiency of the cant increase the grip available
the condition of the road. braking system, a bedding-in according to the condition of
period of about 500 km is the road.
31) The ESC system cannot prevent
required: during this period it is 43) The ASR system cannot prevent
accidents, including those due to
advisable to avoid sharp, repeated accidents, including those due to
excessive speed on corners,
and prolonged braking. excessive speed on corners,
driving on low-grip surfaces or
aquaplaning. 37) If the ABS intervenes, this driving on low-grip surfaces or
indicates that the grip of the tyres aquaplaning.
32) The capability of the ESC system
on the road is nearing its limit: 44) The capability of the ASR system
must never be tested irresponsibly
you must slow down to a speed must never be tested irresponsibly
and dangerously, in such a way
compatible with the available grip. and dangerously, in such a way
as to compromise personal safety
and the safety of others. 38) The ABS cant overrule the as to compromise personal safety
natural laws of physics, and cant and the safety of others.
33) For the correct operation of the
increase the grip available 45) The HBA system cant alter the
ASR system, the tyres must of
according to the condition of the natural laws of physics, and cant
necessity be the same make and
road. increase grip which depends on
type on all wheels, in perfect
condition and, above all, of the 39) The ABS cannot prevent the condition of the road.
prescribed type and dimensions. accidents, including those due to 46) The HBA system cannot prevent
excessive speed on corners, accidents, including those due to
34) The performance of the ESC
driving on low-grip surfaces or excessive speed on corners,
and ASR systems must not
aquaplaning. driving on low-grip surfaces or
encourage the driver to take
unnecessary risks. Your driving 40) The capability of the ABS must aquaplaning.
style must always be suited to the never be tested irresponsibly and
road conditions, visibility and dangerously, in such a way as
traffic. The driver is always to compromise personal safety
responsible for road safety. and the safety of others.

65
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 66

47) The capability of the HBA system Alfa DNA SYSTEM When lever A fig. 75 is moved to d
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

must never be tested irresponsibly (Car dynamic position, the activation of Dynamic
and dangerously, in such a way control system) mode is confirmed by a temporary
as to compromise the safety of variation in the brightness (flashing) of
the driver, the other occupants of This device allows, using lever A fig. 75 the instrument panel.
the car or any other road user. (on the central tunnel), three car
response modes to be selected DRIVING MODES
according to driving style and road
Lever A is monostable type. In other
conditions:
words, it always remains in a central
position.
The selected driving mode is indicated
by the corresponding LED coming on in
the panel and by an indication on the
reconfigurable multifunction display, as
illustrated below:
Dynamic mode fig. 76 (display
image available for versions/markets,
where provided)
75 A0K0612

d = Dynamic (sports driving mode);


n = Natural (mode for driving in
normal conditions);
a = All Weather (mode for driving in
poor grip conditions, such as rain
and snow).
The device also acts on the dynamic
car control systems (engine, steering, 76 A0K0591

VDC system, instrument panel).


All Weather Mode fig. 77

66
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 67

ENGAGEMENT/ Upon release, lever A returns to the


DISENGAGEMENT OF central position.
Dynamic MODE
ESC and ASR: intervention thresholds
IMPORTANT For versions/markets, that allow more enjoyable, sportier
where provided, the "Dynamic" mode driving whilst guaranteeing stability of
cannot be activated until at least 250 the vehicle.
km have been reached, in order to
"ELECTRONIC Q2" system: the
guarantee the correct settling of the
system is calibrated to increase traction
gearbox components during the first
77 A0K0592
whilst accelerating on bends,
kilometres of the vehicle's life. If an
improving the vehicle agility
attempt to activate the system is made
Natural mode before this limit, the display will show Steering wheel tuning: uses the
When Natural mode is selected, no a dedicated message to remind the sports mode function.
messages or symbols are shown on the driver that this request cannot be DST: braking standard control
display. fulfilled. coordinated with ABS/ESC. Standard
ESC and ASR systems: intervention control over lateral acceleration.
Engagement Oversteering compensation depending
thresholds aimed at comfort and safety
in normal grip and driving conditions. Move lever A fig. 75 upwards (next to on the ESC/ASR intervention
the letter d) and hold in this position thresholds: a slight movement on the
"ELECTRONIC Q2" system: the steering wheel encourages the driver to
for 0.5 seconds until the corresponding
system is calibrated to ensure the best carry out the most appropriate
LED lights up or the word Dynamic
driving comfort. manoeuvre.
appears on the display (see fig. 78).
Steering wheel tuning: functions Engine: prompter response +
aimed at comfort in normal conditions Overboost to maximise torque (for
of use. versions/markets, where provided).
DST: braking standard control RAB: by pre-positioning of the brake
coordinated with ABS/ESC. Standard pads (front and rear) following a rapid
control over lateral acceleration. release of the accelerator pedal to
Oversteer compensation: a slight pulse reduce braking times, shorten stopping
on the steering wheel encourages the distances and improve the brake pedal
driver to carry out the most appropriate feeling.
manoeuvre.
78 A0K1510
Engine: standard response.
67
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 68

The activation of the Dynamic mode is ENGAGEMENT/ DST: higher braking control
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

also shown by the change in the DISENGAGEMENT OF All coordinated with ABS/ESC. Standard
instrument panel lighting that, after Weather MODE control over lateral acceleration.
decreasing, reaches the highest Oversteering compensation depending
Engagement
luminosity and then returns to the on the ESC/ASR intervention
previously set values. Move lever A fig. 75 downwards (to the thresholds: a slight movement on the
letter a) and hold in this position for steering wheel encourages the driver to
Disengagement 0.5 seconds until the corresponding carry out the most appropriate
LED lights up or the word All Weather manoeuvre.
To deactivate Dynamic mode and
appears on the display (see fig. 80).
return to Natural, repeat the same Engine: standard response.
movement of the lever within the same
times. In this case, the LED Disengagement
corresponding to Natural mode will To deactivate All Weather mode and
light up and the words Natural on will return to Natural, carry out the same
appear on the display (see fig. 79). procedure described for Dynamic
mode, but move lever A fig. 75 to a.

IMPORTANT
It is not possible to switch directly
80 A0K1511
from Dynamic mode to All
Weather mode and vice versa. You
ESC and ASR systems: intervention must always first go back to Natural
thresholds aimed at guaranteeing mode and then select the other
the maximum safety in low grip driving mode.
conditions. It is recommended to
79 A0K1059 The driving mode engaged before the
activate the "All Weather" mode when
engine stops is maintained when it is
fitting snow chains.
next started.
"ELECTRONIC Q2" system: the
In the event of system failure or a
system is deactivated.
fault with lever A, no driving modes
Steering wheel tuning: maximum can be selected. The display will
comfort. show a warning message.

68
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 69

START&STOP Start&Stop system


SYSTEM activation
(for versions/markets, where provided) A message will be displayed when the
Start&Stop system is activated. In
IN BRIEF this condition, the LED on the button
is off.
The Start&Stop system automatically
stops the engine each time the car Turning the Start&Stop
off
is stationary and starts it again when
the driver wants to move off.
81 A0K0163 Versions with multifunction display: a
message is displayed when the
In this way, the efficiency of the car is Restarting the engine Start&Stop system is deactivated.
increased, by reducing consumption,
emissions of harmful gases and
Press the clutch pedal to restart the Versions with reconfigurable
engine. multifunction display: the symbol
noise pollution.
is displayed + a message when
SYSTEM MANUAL the Start&Stop system is
ACTIVATION/ deactivated.
OPERATING MODES DEACTIVATION
To activate/deactivate the system The LED on the button switches on
Engine stopping mode when the system is deactivated.
manually, press the button located
With the car stopped, the engine stops on the central tunnel fig. 82.
with gearbox in neutral and clutch ENGINE STOPPING
pedal released. FAILURE CONDITIONS

NOTE The engine can only be stopped When the system is active, due to
automatically after exceeding about comfort, emission control and safety
10 km/h, to prevent the engine from reasons, the engine does not stop
being repeatedly stopped when driving in some conditions, among which 10):

at walking pace. engine still cold;


The fig. 81 symbol appears on the especially cold outside temperature;
display when the engine stops. battery not sufficiently charged;
82 A0K0613 particulate filter regeneration (DPF) in
progress (diesel engines only);

69
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 70

driver's door not shut; for versions equipped with dual zone SAFETY FUNCTIONS
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

driver's seat belt not fastened; automatic climate control system (for When the engine is stopped by the
versions/markets, where provided), Start&Stop system, if the driver releases
reverse gear engaged (for example, if an adequate level of thermal
for parking manoeuvres); his/her seat belt and opens the driver's
comfort has not been reached or or passenger's door, the engine can
for versions equipped with dual zone MAX-DEF function activation. be restarted only using the ignition key.
automatic climate control (for With gear engaged, automatic engine
versions/markets, where provided), if The driver is informed by a buzzer
restarting is possible only by fully and by the flashing of the symbol on
an adequate level of thermal comfort depressing the clutch pedal. The driver
has not been reached or with the display; on some versions, a
is informed by the displaying of a message is displayed as well.
MAX-DEF function activation; message on the display and -
during the first period of use, to for versions/markets, where provided - "ENERGY SAVING"
initialise the system. by the flashing of the symbol . FUNCTION
(for versions/markets, where provided)
ENGINE RESTARTING Notes If, following automatic engine restarting,
CONDITIONS
If the clutch is not pressed, about 3 the driver does not carry out any
Due to comfort, emission control and minutes after the engine stops, the action on the car for over 3 minutes,
safety reasons, the engine can restart engine can be restarted only using the the Start&Stop system stops the engine
automatically without any action by the ignition key. once and for all, to prevent fuel
driver, under special conditions, such consumption. In these cases, the
as: In cases when the engine stops and
engine can be restarted only using the
this is not desired, due for example to
battery not sufficiently charged; ignition key.
the clutch pedal being released sharply
reduced braking system vacuum with a gear engaged, if the Start&Stop NOTE In any case, it is possible to keep
(e.g. if the brake pedal is pressed system is activated, the engine can the engine running by deactivating the
repeatedly); be restarted by fully depressing the Start&Stop system.
clutch pedal or by placing the gear lever
car moving (e.g. when driving on IRREGULAR OPERATION
in neutral.
roads with a gradient);
In the event of malfunction, the
engine stopping by Start&Stop Start&Stop system is deactivated.
system for over 3 minutes;

70
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 71

The driver is informed of the fault by the IMPORTANT After turning the ignition
flashing symbol (versions with key to STOP and having closed the
multifunction display) or symbol driver's side door, wait at least one
(versions with reconfigurable minute before disconnecting and then
multifunction display). For versions/ reconnecting the battery electrical
markets where provided, a message is supply.
also displayed.
JUMP STARTING
In this case, contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership. When jump starting, never connect the
negative lead () of the auxiliary battery 85 A0K0614

CAR INACTIVITY to the negative pole A fig. 84 of the


In the event of car inactivity (or if the car battery, but rather to an
battery is replaced), special attention engine/gearbox earth point. 49)

must be paid to the disconnection


of the battery power supply.
IMPORTANT
Proceed as follows: detach connector
A fig. 83 (by pressing button B) from
10) If you wish to run the air
sensor C for monitoring the status
conditioning system, you may
of the battery installed on the negative deactivate the Start&Stop system
battery pole D. This sensor should to allow continuous operation of
never be disconnected from the pole the air conditioning system.
except if the battery is replaced. 48)

84 A0K0755

83 A0K0594

71
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 72

iTPMS (indirect Tyre whenever the tyre pressure is


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

Pressure modified;
Monitoring System) when even only one tyre is changed;
(for versions/markets, where provided)
WARNING when tyres are rotated/inverted;
DESCRIPTION when the space-saver wheel is fitted.
48) When replacing the battery, The car can be equipped with the Before carrying out the RESET, inflate
always contact an Alfa Romeo iTPMS (indirect Tyre Pressure the tyres to the rated pressure values
Dealership. The replacement Monitoring System) which monitors the specified in the inflation pressure table
battery should be of the same (see "Wheels" paragraph in the
tyre inflation status thanks to wheel
type (HEAVY DUTY) and should "Technical specifications" section).
speed sensors.
have the same characteristics.
The system warns the driver if one or If the RESET is not carried out, in all
49) Before opening the bonnet,
more tyres are flat by the dedicated above cases, the warning light may
make sure that the engine is off
and that the ignition key is in warning light continuously on and a give false indications on one or more
the STOP position. Follow the warning message on the display. tyres.
instructions on the dedicated If one tyre only is flat, the system can To carry out the RESET, with the car
label on the front crossmember stopped and the ignition key at
indicate its position: it is anyway
(fig. 85). We recommend that you MAR-ON, press the button fig. 86 on
recommended to check the pressure
remove the key from the ignition if the dashboard for 2 seconds; after
on all four tyres.
other people remain in the car. the RESET, the display shows a
The car should always be left after This indication is displayed also when dedicated message, indicating that the
the key has been removed or turning the engine off and on again until "self-learning" has started.
turned to the STOP position. the RESET procedure is carried out.
During refuelling, make sure that
the engine is off (and that the RESET PROCEDURE
ignition key is in the STOP
The iTPMS system needs an initial
position).
"self-learning" phase (with length
depending on the driving style and road
conditions) which starts when the
RESET procedure is carried out.
The Reset procedure must be carried
out:
86 A0K0608

72
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 73

OPERATING CONDITIONS IMPORTANT 54) The system only warns that the
INFORMATION tyre pressure is low: it is not able
50) 51) 52) 53) 54) 55)
to inflate them.
The system is active for speeds above
55) An insufficient tyre inflation
15 km/h.
increases fuel consumption,
In a few situations such as sporty reduces the tread duration and
driving, particular conditions of the road may affect the capacity of driving
surface (e.g. icy, snowy, unsurfaced WARNING safely.
roads) the signalling may be delayed.
Under special conditions (e.g. car 50) If the system signals a pressure
loaded asymmetrically on one side, decrease on a specific tyre, it is
towing a trailer, damaged or worn tyre, recommended to check the
fitting the space-saver wheel, use of the pressure on all four tyres.
"Fix&Go Automatic" kit, fitting snow 51) iTPMS does not relieve the
chains, fitting different tyres on the driver from the obligation to check
axles) the system may give false the tyre pressure every month; it
indications or be temporarily is not even to be considered a
deactivated. replacing system for maintenance
or a safety system.
If the system is temporarily deactivated
the warning light flashes for about 52) Tyre pressure must be checked
75 seconds and then is continuously with tyres cold. Should it become
on; at the same time, the display shows necessary for whatever reason
to check pressure with warm
a dedicated message.
tyres, do not reduce pressure
This indication is displayed also after even though it is higher than the
the engine has been switched off and prescribed value, but repeat the
then on again if the correct operating check when tyres are cold.
conditions are not restored. 53) The iTPMS cannot indicate
sudden tyre pressure drops (for
example when a tyre bursts).
In this case, stop the car, braking
with caution and avoiding abrupt
steering.

73
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 74

EOBD SYSTEM The car also has a connector, which DUAL PINION
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

(European On can interface with appropriate tools, ACTIVE STEERING


Board Diagnosis) that makes it possible to read the error
(for versions/markets, where provided) codes stored in the electronic control Operation
units together with a series of specific
This only operates with the key turned
Operation parameters for engine operation and
to MAR-ON and the engine started.
diagnosis. This check can also be
The EOBD system (European On Board The steering allows the force required
carried out by the traffic control
Diagnosis) carries out a continuous at the steering wheel to be adjusted
authorities.
diagnosis of the components of the car to suit driving conditions. The different
related to emissions. IMPORTANT After eliminating a fault, to power assistance modes can be
check the system completely, the Alfa selected via the d, n, a positions of the
It also alerts the driver, by switching on
Romeo Dealership is obliged to run Alfa DNA System lever (see paragraph
the warning light on the instrument
tests and, if necessary, road tests entitled Alfa DNA System). 56)
panel, together with a message on
the display, when these components which may also require a long journey. IMPORTANT After the battery is
are no longer in peak condition (see disconnected, the steering must be
Warning lights and messages initialised. The warning light switches on
paragraph in the "Knowing the to indicate this. To carry out this
instrument panel" chapter). procedure, simply turn the steering
The aim of the EOBD system (European wheel all the way from one end to the
On Board Diagnosis) is to: other or drive in a straight line for about
a hundred metres.
monitor the system efficiency;
indicate an increase in emissions;
indicate the need to replace
damaged components.

74
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 75

WIRING FOR RADIO The radio must be fitted in the special


SYSTEM compartment A fig. 87, which can
(for versions/markets, where provided) be removed by pressing the two
retaining tabs in the compartment itself;
WARNING If no Uconnect 5" Radio or the power supply cables are located
Uconnect 6.5" Radio Nav was in this area. 57)
requested with the car, it is provided
56) It is absolutely forbidden to carry with a dual storage compartment in the
out any after-market operation
dashboard fig. 87.
involving steering system or
steering column modifications
(e.g. installation of anti-theft
device) that could adversely affect WARNING
performance and safety,
invalidate the warranty and also 57) When connecting a radio to the
result in non-compliance of the radio system setup, contact an
car with type-approval Alfa Romeo Dealership to prevent
requirements. any faults from occurring that
might compromise the safety of
the car.
87 A0K0665

The radio setup system is composed


of:
car radio power supply cables, front
and rear speakers and an aerial;
radio housing;
aerial on car roof.

75
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 76

ACCESSORIES Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. IMPORTANT The use of these devices
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

PURCHASED BY THE authorises the installation of transceiver inside the passenger compartment
OWNER devices on condition that such (without a separate aerial) may cause
installations are carried out in the vehicles electronic systems to
If after purchasing the car, you decide a workmanlike fashion, following the malfunction. This could compromise
to install electrical accessories that manufacturers instructions, at a safety in addition to constituting a
require a permanent electric supply specialised centre. potential hazard for passengers' health.
(radio, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or
As far as the use of EC-approved
accessories that in any case burden IMPORTANT Traffic police may not
mobile phones is concerned (GSM,
the electric supply, contact an Alfa allow the car on the road if devices
GPRS, UMTS), follow the usage
Romeo Dealership, whose qualified have been installed which modify the
instructions provided by the mobile
personnel, besides suggesting the features of the car. This may also cause
phone manufacturer.
most suitable devices from invalidation of warranty in relation to
Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo, will also faults caused by the change either
check whether the car's electrical directly or indirectly related to it.
system is able to withstand the load Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. shall not
required, or whether it needs to be be liable for damage caused by the
integrated with a more powerful battery. installation of accessories either not WARNING
58) supplied or recommended by Fiat
Group Automobiles S.p.A. and/or not 58) Take care when fitting additional
INSTALLING ELECTRICAL/ installed in compliance with the spoilers or non-standard alloy
ELECTRONIC DEVICES provided instructions. wheels: they could reduce the
Electrical and electronic devices ventilation of the brakes and
installed after buying the car in the RADIO TRANSMITTERS affect efficiency in sharp,
context of after-sales service must carry AND MOBILE PHONES repeated braking or on long
the following label:fig. 88 Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle descents. Make sure that nothing
mobile phones, CB radios, amateur obstructs the pedal stroke (mats,
radio etc.) cannot be used inside the etc.).
car unless a separate aerial is mounted
on the roof.

88 DISPOSITIVI-ELETTRONICI

76
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 77

PARKING SENSORS ACTIVATION The system can also be activated by


(for versions/markets, where provided) pressing the button in the central
Version with rear tunnel: a LED in the button switches on
These are located in the car's front sensors when the system is activated.
bumper fig. 89 and rear bumper fig. 90
On the versions with rear sensors, the Every time the ignition key is turned to
and their function is to inform the driver,
system is activated when the reverse MAR-ON the LED on the button
through an intermittent acoustic signal,
gear is engaged. flashes briefly to indicate that the
about the presence of obstacles in
front of and behind the car. system is running a diagnosis. The LED
Version with front and activation should not be understood
rear sensors as a fault.
On the versions with front sensors and The sensors are deactivated by
rear sensors, the system is activated pressing the button again or when
when the reverse gear is engaged or by a speed of 15 km/h is exceeded: the
pressing the button fig. 91. LED in the button is off when the
system is not active.

INDICATIONS ON
DISPLAY
(for versions/markets, where provided)
89 A0K0360

Versions with rear sensors


When the sensor is activated, the
"Reconfigurable multifunction display"
(for versions/markets, where provided)
91 A0K0361 shows the screen illustrated in fig. 92.

When reverse gear is released, the front Versions with front and rear sensors
and rear sensors remain activated
When the sensors are activated, the
until a speed of around 15 km/h
90 A0K0060 screen in fig. 93 appears on the
is exceeded to allow the parking
"Reconfigurable multifunction display".
manoeuvre to be completed.

77
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 78

ACOUSTIC SIGNAL When reverse gear is engaged an


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

The information concerning the acoustic signal is automatically


presence and distance of an obstacle activated if there is an obstacle within
from the car is transmitted to the driver the range of operation.
by means of acoustic signals from The acoustic signal:
buzzers installed in the passenger increases as distance between the
compartment: car and the obstacle decreases;
in the versions with rear sensors, a becomes continuous when the
buzzer in the front dashboard area distance between the car and the
92 A0K0059
warns of the presence of obstacles at obstacle is less that 30 cm and stops
rear. The volume of the acoustic immediately if the distance
signal can be adjusted through the increases;
option "Warning volume" of the
Setup menu (see Menu items is constant if the distance is unvaried;
paragraph in the Knowing the if this situation occurs for the side
instrument panel section). sensors, the signal will stop after
about 3 seconds to avoid, for
in the versions with front and rear example, indications in the event of
sensors, a front buzzer warns of manoeuvres alongside walls.
the presence of obstacles at the front
93 A0K0814
and a buzzer located at the rear OPERATION WITH
warns of the presence of obstacles at TRAILER
Obstacle presence and distance
the rear. This permits the driver to
information is therefore provided both Parking sensor operation is deactivated
perceive the direction (front/rear) of
by the buzzer and the indication on the automatically when the trailer electric
the obstacles.
display. cable plug is fitted into the car tow
Depending on the position of the hook socket. 11)
If there are several obstacles, the
obstacle (in front or at the rear) the The sensors are automatically
closest one is displayed. On the version
sound is emitted by the corresponding reactivated when the trailer's cable plug
with front and rear sensors, the closest
buzzers (front or rear). The obstacle is removed. 59) 60)
obstacle in the front area and in the
closest to the car is signalled.
rear area is displayed.

78
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 79

GENERAL WARNINGS sensor performance can also be


During parking manoeuvres, pay the influenced by the position of the
utmost attention to any obstacles that sensors. For example by a change in
could be located above or below the the ride setting (caused by the wear
sensors. of the shock absorbers, suspension), IMPORTANT
overloading the vehicle and carrying
Objects located near the rear of the car out specific tuning operations that 11) The sensors must be clean of
are not detected under certain require the vehicle to be lowered; mud, dirt, snow and ice in order
circumstances and could therefore
cause damage to the car or be The detection of obstacles at the top for the system to work. Be careful
part of the car may not be not to scratch or damage the
damaged. sensors while cleaning them.
guaranteed because the system
The following conditions may influence detects obstacles that could cause Avoid using dry, rough or hard
the performance of the parking sensor an impact with the car in the bottom cloths. The sensors must be
system: washed using clean water, with
part.
the addition of car shampoo if
reduced sensor sensitivity and a necessary. When using special
reduction in the parking assistance washing equipment such as high
system performance could be due to pressure jets or steam cleaning,
the presence on the surface of the clean the sensors very quickly
sensor of: ice, snow, mud, thick paint keeping the jet more than 10 cm
the sensors may detect a non- away.
existent obstacle (echo interference)
due to mechanical interference, for
example when washing the car,
in rain (strong wind), hail;
The signals sent by the sensors can WARNING
also be altered by the presence of
ultrasonic systems (e.g. pneumatic 59) Only have the bumpers repainted
brake systems or pneumatic drills) or any retouches to the paintwork
near the vehicle. in the area of the sensors carried
out by an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
Incorrect paint application could
affect the operation of the parking
sensors.

79
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 80

60) Parking and other dangerous REFUELLING THE In order to avoid these problems,
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

manoeuvres are, however, always CAR different types of diesel are distributed
the drivers responsibility. While according to the season: summer type,
carrying out these manoeuvres, Stop the engine before refuelling. winter type and arctic type (cold,
always make sure that no people mountain areas).
(especially children) or animals are PETROL ENGINES
in the area concerned. The If refuelling with diesel whose
Only use unleaded petrol 95 R.O.N. specifications are not suitable for the
parking sensors are an aid for the
compliant with the European usage temperature, it is advisable
driver, but the driver must never
specification EN228. The petrol octane to mix TUTELA DIESEL ART additive in
allow their attention to lapse
rating (R.O.N.) must not be lower than the proportions shown on the container
during potentially dangerous
manoeuvres, even those executed
95. In order to prevent damage to with the fuel. Pour the additive into
at low speeds. the catalytic converter never introduce the tank before the fuel.
even the smallest amount of leaded
petrol, even in the event of an When using or parking the car for a
emergency. long time in the mountains or cold
areas, it is advisable to refuel using
DIESEL ENGINES locally available fuel. In this case, it is
also advisable to keep the tank over
Use only diesel fuel compliant with 50% full.
European specification EN590. The use
of other products or mixtures may FILLING THE TANK
damage the engine beyond repair and
consequently invalidate the warranty, To fill the tank completely, top-up twice
due to the damage caused. after the first click of the fuel supply
gun. Further top-ups could cause faults
in the fuel feeding system.
Operation at low
temperatures
FUEL TANK CAP
If the outside temperature is very low,
the diesel thickens due to the formation The fuel flap is unlocked when the
of paraffin clots with consequent central locking system is released and
defective operation of the fuel supply automatically locked when the central
system. locking system is applied.

80
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 81

Opening PROTECTING THE


Press flap A fig. 94 to release it and ENVIRONMENT
access fuel tank cap B. Then press cap
The following devices are used for
B and turn it anticlockwise. 61)
reducing petrol fuel engine emissions:
catalytic converter, oxygen sensors and
evaporation control system
The following devices are used for
reducing diesel fuel engine emissions:
95 A0K0599 oxidising catalytic converter, exhaust
gas recirculation system (EGR) and
Closure particulate filter (DPF).
Release cap B from device D and insert 62)
it in its housing. Then tighten the cap
94 A0K0598
clockwise until one or more clicks DIESEL PARTICULATE
are heard. Finally, close flap A checking FILTER (DPF)
The cap is provided with a loss that it is correctly locked. (Diesel Particulate Filter)
prevention device C which attaches it (for versions/markets, where provided)
The sealing may cause a slight pressure
to the flap and prevents it from being The Diesel Particulate Filter is a
increase in the tank. A little breathing
lost. Attach the cap to device D during mechanical filter, integral to the exhaust
off, while slackening the cap is
refuelling. system, that physically traps carbon
absolutely normal.
particles present in the exhaust gases
Emergency flap opening of diesel engines.
In case of emergency, pull the cord A The diesel particulate filter is needed to
fig. 95 on the right-hand side of the eliminate almost all carbon particle
boot to open the fuel flap. emissions in compliance with
WARNING current/future regulations and
Pulling the cord will unlock the flap: it
standards.
will then be necessary to press on 61) Keep naked flames or lit
the flap to open it. cigarettes away from the fuel tank
filler: fire risk. Avoid bringing
your face close to the filler, in
order not to breathe in harmful
vapours.

81
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 82

During standard use of the vehicle, the


GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

engine control unit records a set of data


(e.g.: travel time, type of route,
temperatures, etc.) and it will then
calculate how much particulate has WARNING
been trapped by the filter.
Since this filter physically traps 62) The catalytic converter and
particulate, it should be periodically particulate filter (DPF) reach very
regenerated (cleaned) at regular high temperatures during
intervals by burning carbon particles. operation. Therefore do not park
the car on flammable materials
The regeneration procedure is (e.g. grass, dry leaves, pine
controlled automatically by the engine needles, etc.): fire hazard.
management control unit according
to the filter conditions and vehicle use
conditions.
During the regeneration there may be a
limited increase in the engine idle
speed, fan activation, a limited increase
in fumes and high temperatures at the
exhaust.
These are not faults; they do not impair
normal car performance or damage
the environment. If the dedicated
message is displayed, see contents of
"Warning lights and messages"
paragraph, in chapter "Knowing the
instrument panel".

82
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 83

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

This section of the booklet gives you all DISPLAY ......................................... 84 -WATER IN DIESEL FILTER (diesel
the information you need to MENU ITEMS.................................. 87 versions) ............................................. 114
understand, interpret and use the CONTROL PANEL AND - DPF CLEANING (particulate trap) in
instrument panel correctly. progress (diesel versions with DPF
INSTRUMENTS............................... 94 only) ................................................... 116
TRIP COMPUTER ........................... 96 - iTPMS SYSTEM ............................... 117
WARNING LIGHTS AND - ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL
MESSAGES ................................... 99 (ESC) SYSTEM ................................... 119
- LOW BRAKE FLUID/HANDBRAKE - ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL
ENGAGED .......................................... 99 (ESC) SYSTEM ................................... 120
- EBD FAILURE .................................. 100 - CRUISE CONTROL (for
- AIRBAG FAILURE ............................. 100 versions/markets, where provided) ..... 121
- SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENED .......... 100 - SIDE LIGHTS ................................... 121
- ALTERNATOR FAILURE ................... 101 - FOLLOW ME HOME ........................ 121
- LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE ......... 102 - DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS .......... 121
-DEGRADED ENGINE OIL (for - FOG LIGHTS .................................... 121
versions/markets, where provided) ..... 103 - LEFT-HAND DIRECTION
- ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE INDICATOR.......................................... 122
TOO HIGH .......................................... 105 - RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION
- ALFA TCT FAILURE .......................... 106 INDICATOR ........................................ 122
-INCOMPLETE DOOR LOCKING ........ 106 - MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS .............. 122
-SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED ................. 106 -FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM ................... 123
- DUAL PINION ACTIVE STEERING - POSSIBLE ICE ON ROAD ................ 123
FAILURE ............................................. 107 - BRAKE LIGHT FAILURE ................... 123
- ALFA ROMEO CODE SYSTEM - DUSK SENSOR FAILURE ................. 123
FAILURE/ALARM FAILURE ................. 107 - RAIN SENSOR FAILURE .................. 124
- FUEL RESERVE/LIMITED RANGE .... 108 - PARKING SENSOR FAILURE ........... 124
- GENERAL FAILURE ......................... 109 -START&STOP SYSTEM
- GENERAL FAILURE ......................... 110 ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION (for
-REAR FOG LIGHTS ........................... 111 versions/markets, where provided) ..... 125
- ABS FAILURE ................................... 112 -START&STOP FAILURE .................... 125
-BRAKE PAD WEAR ........................... 112 - DISPLAY OF SELECTED DRIVING
- PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG MODE (Alfa DNA system) ................. 126
DEACTIVATED .................................... 112
- INJECTION/EOBD SYSTEM
FAILURE ............................................. 113
- GLOW PLUG HEATING/GLOW
PLUG HEATING FAILURE (diesel
versions) ............................................. 114

83
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 84

DISPLAY C Driving mode selected via "Alfa DNA" A Time


KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

(dynamic car control system) (for B Trip mileage (in km or miles)


The car may be provided with a versions/markets, where provided): d C Milometer (distance covered in km or
multifunction or reconfigurable = Dynamic; n = Natural; a = All miles)
multifunction display that shows useful Weather
information to the driver, according D Car status indications (e.g. doors
D Time (always displayed, even with open, possible ice on road,
to the previous settings, when driving. key removed and doors closed) etc.)/Start&Stop function indication
With the ignition key removed, the E Start&Stop function indicator (for (for versions/markets, where
display lights up and shows the time versions/markets where provided) provided)/Gear Shift Indicator (for
and total odometer reading (in km F Outside temperature versions/markets, where provided)
or miles) for a few seconds when a
G Gear Shift Indicator (for versions/ E Headlamp alignment position (only
door is opened/closed.
markets, where provided) with dipped headlamps on)
MULTIFUNCTION H Headlamp alignment position (only F Outside temperature
DISPLAY "STANDARD" with dipped headlamps on) On some versions, selecting
SCREEN
DYNAMIC driving mode (see Alfa
The following information appears on RECONFIGURABLE
MULTIFUNCTION DNA system paragraph in this section)
the display fig. 96: DISPLAY STANDARD causes the display to show the turbine
SCREEN pressure fig. 98.
The following information appears on
the display fig. 97:

96 A0K2010

98 A0K0539

A Date
B Milometer (distance covered in km or
97 A0K0600
miles)

84
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 85

GEAR SHIFT INDICATOR Note The indication in the instrument Lighting of graphic
panel remains on until the driver shifts symbols/display
The GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) system
advises the driver to change gear gear or the driving conditions go back A few seconds after the key is inserted,
through a special indication on the to a situation where gearshifting is the gauges, graphic symbols and
display fig. 99. not required to improve consumption. display light up in sequence.

WELCOME MOVEMENT Display of graphic


On some versions, when the key is animation
turned to MAR-ON, the following When the key is removed from the
occurs: ignition switch (with the doors closed),
quick movement (up and down) of the display remains lit up and shows
the speedometer and rpm gauge; a graphic animation.
lighting of graphic symbols/display; The display lighting is then dimmed
gradually until it goes out completely.
displaying of an animated graphic
99 A0K0540 representation of the vehicle profile. CONTROL BUTTONS
Through the GSI, the driver is notified Gauge movement fig. 100: to scroll up through the
that changing gear will allow a displayed screen and the related
If the key is removed from the ignition
reduction in fuel consumption. options or to increase the displayed
switch whilst the gauges are moving,
value.
Therefore, for driving oriented towards they immediately go back to their
reducing fuel consumption, it is initial position.
recommended to stick to "Natural" or Once they have reached the full scale
"All Weather" mode and to follow the values, the gauges rest on the value
suggestions of the Gear Shift Indicator, indicated by the vehicle.
where the traffic conditions allow it.
The movement of the gauges stops
When the SHIFT UP icon ( SHIFT) is when the engine is started.
shown on the display, the GSI is
advising the driver to engage a higher
gear, when the SHIFT DOWN (
SHIFT) icon is displayed, it advises 100 A0K0541

the driver to engage a lower gear.

85
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 86

SET/ : press briefly to access the SPEED BEEP Selecting an option from
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

menu and/or go to next screen or the main menu without a


LIGHT SENSOR (for versions/ submenu:
confirm the selection. Hold down to go markets where provided)
back to the standard screen. press the SET/ button briefly to
RAIN SENSOR (for versions/markets, select the main menu setting you
: to scroll down through the where provided) wish to change;
displayed menu and the related options
or to decrease the value displayed. TRIP B ACTIVATION/DATA press buttons or (with
SET TIME single presses) to select the new
IMPORTANT The and setting;
buttons activate different SET DATE
press the SET/ button briefly to
functions according to the following FIRST PAGE (for versions/markets save the new setting and go back to
situations: where provided) the previous main menu option.
within the menu, they allow you to AUTOCLOSE
scroll up and down through the Selecting an option from
MEASUREMENT UNIT the main menu with a
options;
LANGUAGE submenu:
during settings operations, they briefly press the SET/ button to
increase or decrease values. BUZZER VOLUME
display the first submenu option;
SEAT BELT BEEP/BUZZ
SETUP MENU press buttons or (with
SERVICE single presses) to scroll through all
The menu comprises a series of
AIRBAG/PASSENGER BAG the submenu options;
options which can be selected using
the and buttons to access DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS briefly press the SET/ button to
the different selection and setting select the displayed submenu option
ADAPTIVE LIGHTS (for versions/
(Setup) operations indicated below. and to open the relevant settings
markets, where provided)
menu;
Some options have a submenu. The COURTESY LIGHTS
menu can be activated by briefly press buttons or (with
pressing the SET/ button. MENU EXIT single presses) to select the new
setting for this submenu option;
The menu comprises the following Note On cars equipped with radio
options: navigator systems (for versions/ press the SET/ button briefly to
save the new setting and go back to
MENU markets, where provided), some menu
items are shown on the navigator the previous submenu option.
LIGHTING
display.

86
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 87

MENU ITEMS press button SET/ briefly. The if the function is on, press or
level set previously flashes on the to select the desired speed
IMPORTANT With Uconnect 5" display; limit and then press SET/ to
radio system (for versions/markets confirm.
press button or to set
where provided), or Uconnect 6.5"
the required brightness level;
Radio Nav system (for versions/ IMPORTANT Setting is possible
markets, where provided), some Menu briefly press the SET/ button to between 30 and 200 km/h, or 20 and
items are displayed and managed go back to the menu screen or hold 125 mph, according to the previously
through the system and not through the the button down to go back to the set unit. See the "Unit of Measurement"
instrument panel (refer to the dedicated standard screen without saving. paragraph described below. The
supplements). setting will increase/decrease by five
Note On versions with reconfigurable units each time button / is
Menu multifunction display, adjustment can pressed. Hold down the /
be made both with lights off ("Daytime" button to automatically
This item allows you to access the
mode brightness level) and with lights increase/decrease the setting rapidly.
Setup Menu.
on ("Nighttime" mode brightness level). Complete the adjustment with single
Press the or button to presses of the button when you
select the various Menu options. Hold Speed Beep (Speed approach the desired value.
down the SET/ button to return limit)
to the standard screen. Briefly press the SET/ button to go
With this function it is possible to set
back to the menu screen or hold the
the car speed limit (km/h or mph); when
Lighting (Car interior button down to go back to the
this limit is exceeded the driver is
lighting adjustment) standard screen without saving.
(only with side lights on) alerted.
To cancel the setting, proceed as
This function is used to set the To set the desired speed limit, proceed
follows:
brightness of the instrument panel, as follows:
briefly press the SET/ button,
Uconnect system controls (for briefly press the SET/ button: the
"On" will flash in the display;
versions/markets where provided) and display will show the wording "Speed
automatic climate control system Beep"; press button , "Off" will flash on
controls (for versions/markets where the display;
press button or to select
provided) to 8 levels. briefly press the SET/ button to
speed limit activation ("On") or
Proceed as follows to adjust the light deactivation ("Off"); go back to the menu screen or hold
intensity: the button down to go back to the
standard screen without saving.

87
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 88

Headlight sensor Rain sensor (Rain briefly press the SET/ button to
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

(Automatic sensor sensitivity go back to the menu screen or hold


headlight/dusk sensor adjustment) the button down to go back to the
sensitivity adjustment) (for versions/markets, where provided)
(for versions/markets, where provided) standard screen without saving.
This function allows you to adjust the
This function enables the headlights rain sensor sensitivity to 4 levels. Time adjustment (Clock
to come on or go off depending on adjustment)
To set the required sensitivity level
external lighting conditions.
proceed as follows: This function enables to set the clock
The dusk sensor sensitivity can be through two submenus: "Time" and
briefly press the SET/ button, the
adjusted according to 3 levels (level "Format".
previously set sensitivity level will
1=minimum sensitivity, level 2=average
flash on the display; To carry out the adjustment, proceed as
sensitivity, level 3=maximum sensitivity).
follows:
press the or button to
The higher the sensitivity set, the
make the adjustment; briefly press the SET/ button and
lesser is the external light variation
two submenus ("Time" and "Format")
needed to switch the lights on (e.g. with briefly press the SET/ button to
will be displayed;
a setting on level 3 at sunset the go back to the menu screen or hold
headlights come on in advance in the button down to go back to the press the or button to
relation to levels 1 and 2). standard screen without saving. switch between the two submenus;
Proceed as follows to set the desired once you have selected a sub-menu
Activation/Trip B data to be modified, press SET/
adjustment: (Trip B enablement)
briefly;
press the SET/ button briefly to This function may be used to activate
make the display flash the previously when the Time submenu is entered,
(On) or deactivate (Off) the Trip B (partial
set level; by briefly pressing SET/ the
trip). For further information see Trip
hours flash on the display;
press or to make your computer.
choice; press the or button to
Proceed as follows to switch the
make the adjustment;
briefly press the SET/ button to function on and off:
go back to the menu screen or hold briefly press the SET/ button,
press the SET/ button briefly to
the button down to go back to the which makes the display flash the
make the display flash "On" or "Off"
standard screen without saving. "minutes";
according to what was previously set;
press the button or to
press or to make your
make the adjustment.
choice;

88
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 89

IMPORTANT The setting will increase or press the or button to To make your choice, proceed as
decrease by one unit each time the make the adjustment; follows:
button or is pressed. Hold briefly press the SET/ button: the briefly press the SET/ button:
down the button to increase/decrease "month" will flash on the display; "Initial page" will be displayed;
the setting rapidly and automatically.
Complete the adjustment with single press the or button to press the SET/ button again
presses of the button when you make the adjustment; briefly to display the "date" and
approach the desired value. briefly press the SET/ button: the "engine info" options;
When you select "Format": briefly day will flash on the display; press or to select the
pressing the SET/ button makes press the button or to information you wish to see on the
the display mode flash on the display; make the adjustment. main page of the display;

press button or to select briefly press the SET/ button to


IMPORTANT The setting will increase or go back to the menu screen or hold
24h or 12h.
decrease by one unit each time the the button down to go back to the
When you have made the required button or is pressed. Hold standard screen without saving.
settings, briefly press the SET/ the button down to increase/decrease
button to go back to the submenu When the key is turned to MAR-ON
the setting rapidly and automatically.
screen or hold the button down to go and the initial check stage is over, the
Complete the adjustment with single
back to the main menu screen without display will show the information
presses of the button when you
saving the new settings. selected via the "First page" menu
approach the desired value.
function.
Hold the SET/ button down again Briefly press the SET/ button to go
to return to the standard screen or back to the menu screen or hold the Autoclose (Automatic
to the main menu according to where button down to go back to the door lock operation with
you are in the menu. standard screen without saving. car running)
When activated (On), this function locks
Set date (Setting the First page (Display of the doors automatically when the
date) information on the main vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h.
Using this function it is possible to screen)
(for versions/markets, where provided) Proceed as follows to activate or
change the date (day month year).
This function allows you to choose deactivate this function:
Proceed as follows to start the update:
the information you would like to see on press the SET/ button briefly to
briefly press the SET/ button: the main screen. You can view the display a submenu;
the "year" starts flashing on the date or the trip distance.
display;

89
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 90

press the SET/ button briefly to once the submenu to be modified When you have made the required
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

make the display flash "On" or "Off" has been selected, briefly press settings, briefly press the SET/
according to what was previously set; the SET/ button; button to go back to the submenu
press or to make your when the Distance submenu is screen or hold the button down to go
choice; entered: briefly pressing SET/ back to the main menu screen without
displays "km" or "mi" depending saving the new settings.
press the SET/ button briefly to
return to the submenu screen or on the previous setting; Hold the SET/ button down again
hold the button down to return to the press or to make your to return to the standard screen or
main menu screen without saving; choice; to the main menu according to where
you are in the menu.
hold the SET/ button down when the Consumption submenu is
again to return to the standard entered, pressing SET/ displays Language (Language
screen or to the main menu km/l, l/100 km or mpg depending selection)
according to where you are in the on the previous setting; Display messages can be shown in
menu. If the set distance unit is "km", the fuel different languages: Italian, English,
consumption unit will be displayed in German, Portuguese, Spanish, French,
Unit of measurement
(Setting the unit of km/l or l/100 km. Dutch, Turkish and Brazilian.
measurement) If the distance unit set is mi the fuel To set the desired language proceed as
With this function it is possible to set consumption unit will be displayed follows:
the measurement units through three in mpg. briefly press the SET/ button: the
sub-menus: Distance, Consumption press or to make your previously set "language" starts
and Temperature. choice; flashing on the display;
To set the desired measurement unit, when the Temperature submenu is press or to make your
proceed as follows: entered, pressing SET/ displays choice;
briefly press the SET/ button to C or F depending on the briefly press the SET/ button to
display the three sub-menus; previous setting; go back to the menu screen or hold
press button or to press or to make your the button down to go back to the
navigate through the three choice; standard screen without saving.
submenus;

90
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 91

Warnings volume press the SET/ button briefly, the IMPORTANT The Scheduled Servicing
(Adjusting the display shows "OFF" flashing. Press Plan includes car maintenance at
alert/warning acoustic the or button and "On" fixed intervals (refer to the "Maintenance
signal volume)
will appear; and care" chapter). This is displayed
With this function it is possible to adjust automatically, with ignition key at
briefly press the SET/ button to
(to eight levels) the volume of the MAR-ON, 2000 km (or equivalent value
go back to the previous screen or
acoustic signal which sounds in the in miles) before servicing or, where
hold the button down to go back to
event of alerts and warning. provided, 30 days before servicing. It is
the standard screen without saving.
To set the desired volume proceed as also displayed each time the key is
follows: Service (Scheduled turned to MAR-ON or, for
servicing) versions/markets, where provided,
press the SET/ button briefly,
every 200 km (or equivalent value in
making the display flash the This function allows you to display the
miles). Below this threshold servicing
previously set volume "level"; information about km/mileage intervals
indications are more frequent. The
or, for versions/markets, where
press the or button to display will be in km or miles according
provided, time intervals for car
make the adjustment; to the unit of measurement set. When
servicing.
briefly press the SET/ button to the next scheduled service is
To consult this information, proceed as approaching, the word Service will
go back to the menu screen or hold
follows: appear on the display, followed by the
the button down to go back to the
standard screen without saving. briefly press the SET/ button: the number of kilometres/miles or days
display shows when servicing is due (where provided) left, when the key is
Belt reminder in km/mi or days (where provided) turned to MAR-ON. Go to an Alfa
(Reactivation of SBR or mi or days (where provided) Romeo Dealership, where the
buzzer) according to the previous setting (see Scheduled Servicing Plan operations
(for versions/markets, where provided) will be performed and the message
paragraph "Units of measurement");
This function can be displayed only will be reset.
briefly press the SET/ button to
after an Alfa Romeo Dealership has When the service interval is reached
go back to the menu screen or hold
deactivated the SBR system (see and for about 1000 km/600 mi or
the button down to go back to the
paragraph SBR system in the Safety 30 days, a service due message is
standard screen.
chapter). displayed.
To reactivate this function, proceed as
follows:

91
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 92

Passenger airbag/side Daytime running lights Proceed as follows to activate or


KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

bag (front passenger (DRL) deactivate this function:


side airbag and side
bag for pelvis, chest With this function is possible to turn the press the SET/ button briefly to
and shoulder protection daytime running lights on and off. display a submenu;
- Side bag -
activation/deactivation) Proceed as follows to activate or press the SET/ button briefly to
deactivate this function: make the display flash "On" or "Off"
This function is used to activate/
deactivate the passenger side air bag. press the SET/ button briefly to according to what was previously set;
display a submenu; press or to make your choice;
Proceed as follows:
press the SET/ button briefly to press the SET/ button briefly
press the SET/ button and, after make the display flash "On" or "Off" to return to the submenu screen
the message (Bag pass: Off) (to according to what was previously set; or hold the button down to return to
deactivate) or (Bag pass: On) (to
activate) is displayed by pressing press or to make your the main menu screen without
choice; saving;
buttons " " or " ", press
the SET/ button again; press the SET/ button briefly to hold the SET/ button down
return to the submenu screen or again to return to the standard
a confirmation request message will
hold the button down to return to the screen or to the main menu
appear on the display;
main menu screen without saving; according to where you are in the
by pressing the or menu.
buttons select "Yes" (to confirm hold the SET/ button down
activation/deactivation) or "No" (to again to return to the standard Courtesy lights
cancel); screen or to the main menu (Activation/deactivation
according to where you are in the of Greeting lights)
press the SET/ button briefly, a menu. (for versions/markets, where provided)
message confirming the selection
With this function it is possible to turn
will be displayed and you will return AFS adaptive lights on the side lights, the number plate
to the menu screen or, pressing (Adaptive Frontlight
System) lights and the ceiling lights for
the button for longer, you will return
(for versions/markets, where provided) approximately 25 seconds when the
to the standard screen without
doors or boot are opened using the
memorising. This function allows the AFS (Adaptive
remote control, with the following
Frontlight System) to be activated/
exceptions:
deactivated.
interruption after 5 seconds from
when the door closes

92
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 93

interruption after locking using the Menu exit


remote control This is the last function that closes the
interruption after a lock or other cycle of settings listed in the menu
action using the remote control screen.
Proceed as follows to activate or Pressing the SET/ button briefly will
deactivate this function: return the display to the standard
press the SET/ button briefly to screen without saving.
make the display flash "On" or "Off" Press the button to return to the
according to what was previously set; first menu option.
press or to make your
choice;
briefly press the SET/ button to
go back to the menu screen or hold
the button down to go back to the
standard screen without saving.

93
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 94

CONTROL PANEL AND INSTRUMENTS


KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

VERSIONS WITH MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY

1 130
Benzina AcquaC

1/2 90
160 180 5
140 200
0 50
4 6
120 220
100 240 3 7
80 260 Mon 15 Mar 8
60 2
120

40
20 1
0 0 Giri x 1000

101 A0K2300

A. Speedometer (speed indicator) B. Multifunction display C. Rev counter D. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light E. Engine coolant
temperature indicator with overheating warning light
Warning lights supplied on diesel versions only. On diesel versions, the end of scale for the rev counter is 6000
rpm

IMPORTANT The illumination of the instrument panel graphics may vary according to version.
.

94
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 95

VERSIONS WITH RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY

1 130
Benzina AcquaC

1/2 90
160 180 5
140 200
0 50
4 6
120 220
100 240 3 7
80 260 20:30 Monday 8
20 C 15
60 2 March 2
120

40
20
123456 km 1
0 0 Giri x 1000

102 A0K2301

A. Speedometer (speed indicator) B. Reconfigurable multifunction display C. Rev counter D. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light E.
Engine coolant temperature indicator with overheating warning light
Warning lights supplied on diesel versions only. On diesel versions, the end of scale for the rev counter is 6000
rpm

IMPORTANT The illumination of the instrument panel graphics may vary according to version.

95
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 96

SPEEDOMETER (SPEED TRIP COMPUTER


KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

ENGINE COOLANT
INDICATOR) TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR
This shows the speed of the car. IN BRIEF
The needle shows the temperature of
REV COUNTER the engine coolant and starts supplying
The Trip computer is used to display
This indicates the engine rpm. indications when the fluid temperature
information on car operation when
exceeds approx. 50C.
the key is turned to MAR.
FUEL LEVEL GAUGE Under normal conditions, the needle
This function is characterised by two
This shows the amount of fuel left in the assumes different positions within
separate memories, called "Trip A"
fuel tank. the scale depending on the usage
and "Trip B", where the car's
conditions.
The warning light in the gauge lights up "complete missions" (journeys) are
when there are only 8 to 10 litres of The warning light turns on to indicate recorded in a reciprocally
fuel remaining in the tank; if this an overheating of the engine coolant. In independent manner.
happens, refuel as soon as possible. this case, stop the engine and contact
Both memories can be reset: i.e. start
an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
Do not travel with the fuel tank almost of a new journey.
empty: any gaps in fuel delivery could
damage the catalytic converter.
Trip A is used to display the figures
relating to:
Range
Distance travelled
Average fuel consumption
Instant fuel consumption
Average speed
Trip time (driving time).
Trip B may be used to display the
figures relating to:
Distance travelled B
Average consumption B

96
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 97

Average speed B Distance covered


Trip time B (driving time). Shows the distance covered since the
The Trip B function may be disabled start of the new journey.
(see Activating Trip B). Range and
Instant consumption" parameters Average consumption
cannot be reset. Shows the approximate average fuel
consumption since the start of the new
VALUES DISPLAYED journey.

Range 103 A0K2011


Instantaneous consumption
This indicates the indicative distance This indicates the fuel consumption. the word Trip (or Trip A or Trip B)
that may be travelled with the fuel in the The value is constantly updated. The (B);
tank, assuming that driving conditions display will show - - - - if the car
do not change. the name, value and unit of
is parked with the engine running.
measurement of the selected
The display will show the reading '-----'
parameter (e.g. Range 1500 km)
when the following events take place: Average speed (C).
range value lower than 50 km (or This shows the average car speed as a After a few seconds the name and
30 mi) function of the overall time elapsed value of the selected parameter are
car parked with engine running for a since the start of the new journey. replaced by an icon fig. 104.
long period.
Trip time
IMPORTANT The range can be affected The time elapsed since the start of a
by several factors: driving style (see new journey.
Driving style paragraph in the
Starting and driving chapter), type of INDICATIONS ON THE
route (motorway, towns and cities, DISPLAY
mountain roads, etc.), conditions of use
Each time a value is displayed, the
(load, tyre pressures, etc.). Trip
following information is shown:
planning must therefore take the above
into account. animated icon in the upper part fig.
104 A0K0007
103;

97
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 98

The icons relating to the various IMPORTANT The reset operation when
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

parameters are the following: Trip A details are being displayed


"Range"; only resets the information associated
with this function.
"Average consumption A (if
Trip A is active, or B if Trip B is IMPORTANT The reset operation when
active); Trip B details are being displayed
"Distance" (if Trip A is resets only the information associated
active, or B if Trip B is active); with this function.

"Instantaneous consumption"; 105 A0K0096


Start of journey
"Average speed A (if Trip A procedure
New mission
is active, or B if Trip B is active); With the ignition key at MAR-ON, reset
This begins after a reset:
"Trip time" (if Trip A is active, or by pressing the TRIP 0.00 button and
B if Trip B is active); manual resetting by the user, by holding it down for more than 2
pressing the relevant button; seconds.
TRIP BUTTON 0.00 automatic resetting, when the trip
distance reaches 99999.9 km or Trip Exit
The TRIP 0.00 button is located on the
right hand stalkfig. 105. With the when the Travel time reaches You can automatically exit the Trip
ignition key turned to MAR-ON, this 999:59 (999 hours and 59 minutes); function once all the values have been
button allows you to view the previously after disconnection/reconnection of displayed or by holding the SET/
described values and also set them to the battery. button down for more than 1 second.
zero to begin a new mission:
short press: display various values;
long press: values reset and start of a
new mission.

98
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 99

WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES


IMPORTANT The warning light switches on together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner Handbook, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
information in this section in the event of a failure indication.
IMPORTANT Failure indications displayed are divided into two categories: very serious and less serious failures. Serious faults
are indicated by a repeated and prolonged warning "cycle". Less serious faults are indicated by a warning "cycle" with a shorter
duration. The display cycle of both categories can be interrupted. The instrument panel warning light will stay on until the
cause of the malfunction is eliminated.

WARNING LIGHTS IN INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel
LOW BRAKE FLUID/HANDBRAKE ENGAGED
The warning light switches on when the key is
turned to MAR-ON, but it should switch off after a
few seconds.
Low brake fluid level
The warning light (or symbol on the display) Restore the brake fluid level, then check that the
switches on when the level of the brake fluid in warning light has switched off.
the reservoir falls below the minimum level, If the warning light stays on, contact an Alfa
possibly due to leaks in the circuit. Romeo Dealership.
red The display shows the dedicated message.
Handbrake applied
Release the handbrake, then check that the
The warning light (or symbol on the display)
warning light has switched off.
switches on when the handbrake is engaged. If
If the warning light (or symbol on the display)
the car is moving an acoustic signal is also
stays on, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
emitted.

99
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 100
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel

EBD FAILURE
The simultaneous switching on of the (red)
and (amber) warning lights with the engine
Drive very carefully to the nearest Alfa Romeo
red on, indicates either a fault of the EBD system or
Dealership to have the system inspected
that the system is not available. In this case, the
immediately.
rear wheels may suddenly lock and the vehicle
may swerve when braking sharply.
The display shows the dedicated message.
amber
AIRBAG FAILURE
When the key is turned to MAR-ON, the warning
light switches on but should switch off after a few
seconds. 63) 64)
If the warning light switches on constantly, this
red indicates a fault in the airbag system.
The display shows the dedicated message.
SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENED
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light switches on constantly with the For permanent deactivation of the SBR (Seat Belt
car stationary and the drivers seat belt not Reminder) system buzzer, contact an Alfa Romeo
fastened. Dealership. The system can be reactivated using
The warning light flashes and a buzzer sounds if the Setup Menu.
red
the car is in motion and the front seat belts are
not correctly fastened.

100
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 101

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel
ALTERNATOR FAILURE
The warning light switches on when the ignition
If the warning light (or symbol on the display)
key is turned to MAR-ON, but it should switch off
stays on constantly or flashing, contact an Alfa
as soon as the engine has started (with the
Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.
engine idling a brief delay before switching off is
red
acceptable).

WARNING

63) If the warning light does not switch on when the key is turned to MAR-ON or if it stays on when driving (together
with the message on the display), there may be a fault in the restraint systems; in this case, the airbags or
pretensioners may not deploy in the event of an accident or, in a lower number of cases, they could deploy
erroneously. Before proceeding, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the system checked immediately.
64) Failure of the warning light is signalled by the flashing for longer than the usual 4 seconds of the warning light
(located in the trim above the internal rear view mirror). In addition, the airbag system automatically disables the
passenger side airbag. In this case, the warning light may not indicate a fault in the restraint systems. Before
proceeding, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the system checked immediately.

101
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 102
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel
LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
When the key is turned to MAR-ON the warning light comes on, but
should go out as soon as the engine is started.
12)
The warning light switches on constantly together with a message on the
display (for versions/markets, where provided) when the system detects
red
that engine oil pressure is low.

IMPORTANT

12) If the warning light switches on when driving, stop the engine immediately and contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership.

102
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 103

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel
DEGRADED ENGINE OIL (for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light will turn on flashing together with a dedicated message
on the display (for versions/markets where provided).
Depending on the versions, the warning light flashing modes are as
follows:
- for 1 minute every two hours;
- for 3 minute cycles with the warning light off for intervals of 5 seconds
until oil is changed.
After the initial warning, each time the engine is started up, the warning
Contact an Alfa Romeo
light will continue to flash in the same mode, until the oil is changed. A
Dealership as soon as
specific message will appear on the display (for versions/markets, where
possible.
provided) in addition to the warning light. If the warning light flashes, this
65) 66)
red does not mean that there is a fault, but simply informs that it is now
necessary to change the oil as a result of regular use of the car. Engine oil
deterioration is accelerated by:
- mainly town use of the car which makes the DPF regeneration process
more frequent;
- use of the vehicle for short drives, in which the engine does not have
time to reach its regular operating temperature;
- repeated interruptions of the regeneration process, signalled by the DPF
warning light switching on.

103
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 104
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

WARNING

65) Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible after the warning light comes on, and never more
than 500 km after it first switches on. Failure to observe the above indications may result in severe damage to the
engine and invalidate the warranty. Remember that when this warning light comes on, it does not mean that the level
of engine oil is low, so if it flashes you must not top up the engine oil.
66) If the warning light flashes with the car in motion, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.

104
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 105

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel
When driving normally: stop the car, switch off the
engine and check that the water level in the
reservoir is not below the MIN mark. If it is, wait
for the engine to cool down, then slowly and
carefully open the cap, top up with coolant and
check that the level is between the MIN and MAX
marks on the reservoir. Also check visually for any
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE TOO fluid leaks. Should the warning light turn on again
HIGH at the next start-up, contact an Alfa Romeo
When the key is turned to MAR-ON, the warning Dealership.
light switches on but should switch off after a few If the car is used under demanding conditions
seconds. The warning light turns on when the (e.g. in high-performance driving): slow down
red engine is overheated. and, if the warning light stays on, stop the car.
The display shows the dedicated message. Wait for 2 or 3 minutes with the engine running
and slightly accelerated to further favour the
coolant circulation. Then stop the engine. Check
the correct coolant level as described above.
IMPORTANT Over demanding routes, it is
advisable to keep the engine on and slightly
accelerated for a few minutes before switching it
off.

105
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 106
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel
ALFA TCT FAILURE
(for versions/markets, where provided)
When the key is turned to MAR-ON, the warning
light switches on but should switch off after a few Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as
seconds. possible.
The warning light flashes (together with a If it is necessary to start the engine with a
message in the display and an acoustic signal) to transmission failure, follow the procedure
indicate that the transmission is faulty. described in the "Alfa TCT" paragraph, in chapter
red
The warning light can switch on even in case of "Starting and driving".
transmission overheating, after a particularly
demanding use. In this case an engine
performance limitation is carried out.
INCOMPLETE DOOR LOCKING
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light (or symbol on the display) lights
up when one or more doors or the tailgate are not
closed correctly. An acoustic signal is activated
with the doors open and the car moving.
red On some versions the warning light (or symbol on
the display) also lights up when the bonnet is not
closed correctly.
SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light switches on when the car
exceeds the speed limit value set in the Setup
Menu (e.g. 120 km/h).
On some versions a message is shown along
red
with a symbol on the display, and an acoustic
signal is emitted.

106
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 107

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel
DUAL PINION ACTIVE STEERING FAILURE
(for versions/markets, where provided) Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as
When the key is turned to MAR-ON, the warning possible.
light switches on but should switch off after a few
seconds. IMPORTANT After the battery is disconnected,
If the warning light (or symbol on the display) the steering must be initialised. The warning light
remains on, you may not have steering assistance switches on to indicate this. To carry out this
red and the effort required to operate the steering procedure, simply turn the steering wheel all the
wheel could be notably increased; steering is, way from one end to the other or drive in a
however, possible. straight line for about 100 metres.
The display shows the dedicated message.

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel
ALFA ROMEO CODE SYSTEM FAILURE/
ALARM FAILURE
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light (or symbol on the display) will Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as
come on (on some versions, with a message on possible.
the display) to indicate an Alfa Romeo CODE
system or alarm failure (for versions/markets,
where provided).
amber
Break-in attempt
If this warning light flashes or, on some versions, if Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as
the symbol appears in the display (together with a possible.
message) this indicates a break-in attempt.

107
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 108
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel
FUEL RESERVE/LIMITED RANGE
The warning light turns on when about 8 - 10
litres of fuel are left in the tank.
When the remaining range is lower than approx. 67)
50 km (or equivalent value in miles), on some
amber versions the display will show a warning
message.

WARNING

67) If the warning light flashes with the car in motion, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.

108
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 109

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel
GENERAL FAILURE
(for versions/markets, where provided) In these cases contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership
The warning light switches on in the to have the fault fixed as soon as possible.
circumstances indicated below.
Fuel cut-off
The warning light switches on when the fuel
cut-off system intervenes. The display shows the
dedicated message.
Start&Stop system failure
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light comes on when a fault is
detected in the Start&Stop system.
amber
Rain sensor failure
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light switches on when a rain sensor
fault is detected.
Parking sensor failure
(for versions/markets, where provided)
See the following description for Parking sensor
failure.

109
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 110
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel
GENERAL FAILURE
(for versions/markets, where provided) In these cases contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership
The warning light switches on in the to have the fault fixed as soon as possible.
circumstances indicated below.
Dusk sensor failure
(for versions/markets, where provided)
This warning light comes on when a dusk sensor
fault is detected.
Engine oil pressure sensor failure
The warning light comes on when the engine oil
pressure sensor is faulty. The display shows the
dedicated message.
AFS adaptive lights failure
amber (for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light switches on when a fault is
detected with the AFS adaptive lights (see the
AFS adaptive lights paragraph in the "Knowing
your vehicle" section). The display shows the
dedicated message.
Anti-pinch system failure
The warning light comes on when a fault is
detected in the electric window anti-pinch
system. The display shows the dedicated
message.

110
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 111

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel
Exterior lights failure
The warning light switches on when a fault is Check, and if necessary replace the fuses
detected on one of the following lights: involved, in accordance with the "Fuse
daytime running lights (DRL) replacement" paragraph, in chapter "In an
emergency". If this does not resolve the fault,
side lights check, and if necessary replace, the bulbs
direction indicators involved, in accordance with the "External bulb
replacement" paragraph, in chapter "In an
rear fog lights
amber emergency".
number plate lights Should this operation also fail to resolve the fault,
The fault relating to these lights may be caused contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership, for a
by: one or more blown fuses, one or more blown comprehensive check of the electrical system.
bulbs or a broken electrical connection.

REAR FOG LIGHTS


This warning light comes on when the rear fog
lights are switched on.
amber

111
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 112
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel
ABS FAILURE
When the key is turned to MAR-ON, the warning
light switches on but should switch off after a few
seconds.
The warning light (or symbol on the display) Drive carefully and contact an Alfa Romeo
switches on when the system is inefficient. In this Dealership as soon as possible.
case the braking system will work as normal, but
amber
without the extra performance offered by the
ABS.
The display shows the dedicated message.
BRAKE PAD WEAR
(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light (or symbol on the display)
Have them replaced as soon as possible.
switches on when the front and rear brake pads
are worn.
amber
The display shows the dedicated message.
PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG DEACTIVATED
The warning light (located in the trim above the
internal rear view mirror) switches on deactivating
the front passenger side airbag.
With front passenger airbag on, when the ignition
68)
key is turned to MAR-ON, the warning light
switches on constantly for several seconds and
amber
then it should switch off.
If the warning light flashes, this indicates a fault
in the warning light.

112
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 113

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel
INJECTION/EOBD SYSTEM FAILURE
In normal conditions, when the ignition key is turned to
MAR-ON the warning light switches on, but it should
switch off as soon as the engine is started. The operation 13)
of warning light may be checked by the traffic police
using specific devices. Comply with the laws and
regulations of the country where you are driving.
If the warning light remains on or switches on whilst
Under these conditions, you may continue
driving, it means that the injection system is not working
travelling at a moderate speed without
properly. The warning light on constantly signals a
demanding excessive effort from the
malfunction in the supply/ignition system which could
engine. Prolonged use of the car with the
cause high exhaust emissions, a possible loss of
warning light on constantly may cause
performance, poor driveability and high consumption.
damage.
amber On some versions, the display shows the dedicated
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as
message. The warning light goes out after the fault
soon as possible.
disappears: the indication is stored in the system.
In this case, release the accelerator pedal
to lower the speed of the engine until the
Petrol engines only warning light stops flashing. Continue the
If the warning light flashes, it means that the catalytic journey at moderate speed, trying to avoid
converter may be damaged. driving conditions that may cause further
flashing and contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership as soon as possible.

113
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 114
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel
GLOW PLUG HEATING/GLOW PLUG
HEATING FAILURE (diesel versions)
This warning light switches on when the key is
turned to MAR-ON. It will switch off as soon as
the heater plugs have reached a preset
temperature. The engine can be started as soon
as the warning light switches off.
IMPORTANT In mild or high temperature
conditions, the warning light comes on for a very
amber short time only.
Glow plug preheating failure
The warning light will flash (a message will appear Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as
on the display, on some versions) to indicate a possible.
fault in the glow plugs preheating system.
WATER IN DIESEL FILTER (diesel versions)
The warning light remains on constantly when
driving (together with a message in the display),
14)
to indicate the presence of water in the diesel
filter.
amber

WARNING

68) Failure of the warning light is indicated by the warning light switching on. In addition, the airbag system
automatically disables the passenger side airbag. Before proceeding, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the
system checked immediately.

114
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 115

IMPORTANT

13) If, turning the ignition key to MAR-ON, the warning light does not turn on or if it turns on steadily or flashing
when travelling (on certain versions together with the message on the display), contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership
as soon as possible.

IMPORTANT

14) The presence of water in the fuel supply system circuit may cause severe damage to the injection system and
irregular engine operation. If the warning light comes on in the instrument panel (together with a message in the
display) contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible to bleed the system. If the above indications come
on immediately after refuelling, water has probably been poured into the tank: turn the engine off immediately and
contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.

115
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 116
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel
DPF CLEANING (particulate trap) in progress
(diesel versions with DPF only)
When the key is turned to MAR-ON, the warning
light switches on but it should switch off after a
few seconds. The warning light switches on
constantly to indicate that the DPF system needs
to eliminate the trapped pollutants (particulate)
through the regeneration process.
The warning light does not come on during every
DPF regeneration, but only when driving
conditions require that the driver is notified. To
69)
turn off the warning light, keep the car in motion
until the regeneration process is over.
amber
On average, the process lasts 15 minutes.
Optimal conditions for completing the process are
achieved by travelling at 60 km/h with engine
speed above 2000 rpm.
When this warning light switches on, it does not
indicate a car failure and thus it should not be
taken to a workshop. On some versions, together
with the warning light switching on, the display
shows a dedicated message.

WARNING

69) Always drive at a speed appropriate to the traffic conditions, the weather and traffic regulations. The engine can be
stopped even if the DPF warning light is on: however, repeated interruptions of the regeneration process could cause
premature deterioration of the engine oil. For this reason, always wait until the warning light switches off before
stopping the engine as described above. It is not advisable to complete DPF regeneration with the car stationary.
116
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 117

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel
IMPORTANT Do not continue driving with one or
more flat tyres as handling may be
iTPMS SYSTEM compromised. Stop the car, avoiding sharp
When the key is turned to MAR-ON, the warning braking and steering. Repair immediately using
light switches on but should switch off after a few the dedicated kit (see the "Replacing a wheel"
seconds. paragraph in the "In an emergency" section) and
contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as
possible.
iTPMS failure/iTPMS temporarily deactivated
The warning light flashes for about 75 seconds and
amber then stays on constantly (together with a message
on the display) (see Operating conditions
paragraph) to indicate that the system is If the malfunction warning persists, contact an
temporarily deactivated or faulty. Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.
The system goes back to normal operation when
the operating conditions allow it. If this is not the
case, carry out the Reset procedure after restoring
the normal operating conditions.

117
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 118
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel
Low tyre pressure
The warning light switches on constantly to
In any situation in which the message on the
indicate that the tyre pressure is lower than the
display is "See manual", it is ESSENTIAL to refer
recommended value, in order to guarantee long
to the contents of the "Wheels" paragraph in the
tyre life and low fuel consumption, or to indicate a
"Technical specifications" section, strictly
slow loss of pressure.
complying with the indications that you find
In this way the iTPMS warns the driver that one or
there.
more tyres may be flat and liable to puncture. In
IMPORTANT Do not continue driving with one or
amber this case it is advisable to restore the correct
more flat tyres as handling may be
pressure value (see the "Wheels" paragraph in the
compromised. Stop the car, avoiding sharp
"Technical specifications" section).
braking and steering.
Once the normal operating conditions of the car
are restored, carry out the Reset procedure.

118
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 119

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel
ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC)
SYSTEM
When the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON, the
warning light switches on, but should switch off
as soon as the engine is started.
Intervention by the system is indicated by the
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as
flashing of the warning light: it indicates that the
possible to have the problem diagnosed and
car is in critical stability and grip conditions.
resolved.
If the warning light (or symbol on the display)
amber
does not switch off, or if it stays on with the
engine running, this means that an ESC system
fault is present.
On some versions, the display shows the
dedicated message.

119
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 120
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel
ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC)
SYSTEM
ASR system failure
When the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON, the
warning light switches on, but should switch off
as soon as the engine is started.
The warning light will flash while driving to indicate In this case, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as
that the ASR system is intervening. soon as possible.
If the warning light (or symbol on the display)
does not switch off, or if it stays on with the
engine running, this means that an ASR system
amber malfunction has been detected.
On some versions, the display shows the
dedicated message.
Hill Holder system failure
The warning light switches on together with the In this case, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as
symbol and corresponding message on the soon as possible.
display to indicate Hill Holder system failure.

120
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 121

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel
CRUISE CONTROL (for versions/markets,
where provided)
This warning light switches on when the ignition
key is turned to MAR-ON, but it should switch off
after a few seconds, if the Cruise Control is
deactivated. The warning light switches on when
the Cruise Control ring nut is turned to the ON
green
position (see the Cruise Control paragraph in
the "Knowing your vehicle" section).
The display shows the dedicated message.
SIDE LIGHTS
The warning light switches on when the side
lights are activated.
FOLLOW ME HOME
The warning light switches on (together with a
green message shown on the display) when this device
is in use (see the "Exterior lights" paragraph in the
"Knowing your vehicle" section).

2
DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS
The warning light switches on when the dipped
beam headlights are turned on.
green

FOG LIGHTS
The warning light comes on when the fog lights
are turned on.
green

121
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 122
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel
LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR
The warning light switches on when the direction
indicator control lever is moved downwards or,
together with the right direction indicator, when
green the hazard warning light button is pressed.
RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR
The warning light turns on when the direction
indicator control lever is moved upwards or,
together with the left direction indicator, when the
green hazard warning light button is pressed.

Warning lights on What it means What to do


panel

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS


The warning light switches on when the main
beam headlights are turned on.
blue

122
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 123

SYMBOLS AND MESSAGES ON THE DISPLAY

Symbol on the What it means What to do


display
For the procedure to restore the fuel cut-off
FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM system see the Controls" paragraph in the
On some versions the display will show a "Knowing your vehicle" section. If it is still not
message + symbol if the fuel cut-off intervenes. possible to restore the fuel supply, contact an Alfa
Romeo Dealership.
POSSIBLE ICE ON ROAD
On versions equipped with reconfigurable
multifunction display, a message and a symbol
will appear on the display when the outside
temperature falls to or below 3C.
On versions with Multifunction display only the
dedicated message is shown.

IMPORTANT In the event of outside temperature


sensor failure, the digits that indicate the value are
replaced by dashes.
BRAKE LIGHT FAILURE
The fault may be caused by a blown bulb, a
On some versions the display will show a
blown protection fuse or an interruption of the
message + symbol if there is a fault in the brake
electrical connection.
lights.
DUSK SENSOR FAILURE
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Go to an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the fault
On some versions the display will show a
fixed as soon as possible.
message + symbol if there is a fault in the dusk
sensor.

123
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 124
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Symbol on the What it means What to do


display
RAIN SENSOR FAILURE
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Go to an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the fault
On some versions the display will show a
fixed as soon as possible.
message + symbol if there is a fault in the rain
sensor.
PARKING SENSOR FAILURE
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Go to an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the fault
On some versions the display will show a
fixed as soon as possible.
message + symbol if there is a fault in the parking
sensors.

124
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 125

Symbol on the What it means What to do


display
START&STOP SYSTEM ACTIVATION/
DEACTIVATION (for versions/markets, where
provided)
Start&Stop system activation
A message will appear on the display when the
Start&Stop system is activated. In this case the
LED located on the button is off (see the
Start&Stop paragraph in this chapter).
Start&Stop system deactivation
Versions with multifunction display: a message is
displayed when the Start&Stop system is
deactivated.
Versions with reconfigurable multifunction display:
the symbol + message appear on the display
when the Start&Stop system is deactivated.
The LED on the button is on when the system
is deactivated.
START&STOP FAILURE
If the Start&Stop system is faulty the (versions
with multifunction display) or (versions with
In these cases contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership
reconfigurable multifunction display) symbol
to have the fault fixed as soon as possible.
flashes on the display.
For versions/markets, where provided, a warning
message is also displayed.

125
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 126
KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Symbol on the What it means What to do


display
DISPLAY OF SELECTED DRIVING MODE
(Alfa DNA system)
On versions equipped with a "Reconfigurable
multifunction display", a message and the symbol
associated with the selected driving mode
DYNAMIC, NATURAL or ALL WEATHER are
shown. A warning message is shown on the
display if one of these driving modes is not
available.
On versions equipped with "Multifunction
display", a letter ("d" or "a") associated with the
selected driving mode is shown together with a
dedicated message.

126
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 127

SAFETY

The chapter that you are about to read SEAT BELTS ..................................128
is very important: it describes the SBR SYSTEM (SEAT BELT
safety systems with which the car is REMINDER) ....................................129
equipped and provides instructions on
how to use them correctly. PRETENSIONERS...........................131
CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY......133
FITTING UNIVERSAL CHILD
SEAT (WITH SEAT BELTS)...............134
PREPARATION FOR ISOFIX
CHILD SEAT ...................................137
FRONT AIRBAGS............................140
SIDE AIRBAGS (SIDE BAGS -
WINDOW BAGS).............................144

127
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 128

SEAT BELTS The retractor may lock when the car is


SAFETY

parked on a steep slope: this is


USING THE SEAT BELTS perfectly normal. Furthermore, the
retractor mechanism locks the belt if it
The belt should be worn keeping the
is pulled sharply or in the event of
torso straight and rested against the
sudden braking, collisions or
backrest.
high-speed bends.
To fasten the seat belts, hold the
The rear seat is fitted with inertia seat
tongue A fig. 106 and insert it into the
belts with three anchor points and a
buckle B, until it clicks into place.
retractor. 108 A0K0628

Wear the rear seat belts as illustrated in


fig. 107. IMPORTANT When putting the rear
seats back to their normal position,
make sure the seat belts are positioned
so they are ready to use.

106 A0K0659
WARNING
On removal of the belt, if it jams, let it
107 A0K0161
rewind for a short stretch, then pull 70) Never press button C fig. 106
it out again without jerking. while travelling.
IMPORTANT The backrest is correctly
To unfasten the seat belts, press button 71) Remember that, in the event of
secured when the red band B fig.
C and guide the seat belt with your an accident, the rear seat
108 on backrest folding handle A
hand while it is rewinding, to prevent it passengers not wearing seat belts
disappears. This red band indicates are exposed to a very serious
from twisting. 70) 71) 72)
that the backrest is not secured. risk and also represent a serious
danger for the front seat
occupants.

128
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 129

72) Make sure that the backrest is SBR SYSTEM (Seat


correctly secured on both sides Belt Reminder)
("red bands" B fig. 108 not visible)
to prevent it from moving forward This system comprises an acoustic
in the event of sharp braking, warning which, in conjunction with the
causing injuries to occupants. warning lights flashing on the
instrument panel, advises the front seat
passengers if their seat belt has not
been fastened.
On some versions there is also a panel
(provided as an alternative to the
warning light on the instrument panel)
located above the interior rear view
mirror, which warns the front and back
seat passengers through acoustic
and visual signals if their seat belts have
not been fastened.
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership to
deactivate this acoustic warning
permanently. 109 A0K0075

The acoustic warning can be


reactivated at any time through the 4 = rear right seat (passenger);
Setup Menu (see "Menu options" 5 = front right seat (passenger status
paragraph in the Knowing the for left-hand drive versions).
instrument panel chapter).
The warning lights may be red or green
and operate as follows:
1 = front left seat (driver status for
left-hand drive versions);
2 = rear left seat (passenger);
3 = rear centre seat (passenger);

129
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 130

If both front seat belts are unfastened a IMPORTANT


SAFETY

FRONT SEATS (warning


light no. 1 = driver and few seconds apart while the car is The warning lights are all off if all seat
no. 5 = passenger) travelling, the acoustic signal will refer belts (front and rear) are already
to the most recent event and the two fastened when the ignition key is turned
Driver
warning lights will proceed with the to MAR.
If the driver is the only occupant and visual indication independently.
their seat belt is not fastened, when 20 All warning lights switch on when at
km/h is exceeded or when travelling REAR SEATS (warning least one belt changes from fastened to
at a speed between 10 and 20 km/h for light no. 2, no. 3 and no. unfastened or vice versa.
longer than 5 seconds, an acoustic 4)
signal cycle will be started for the front For the rear seats, the reminder cycle is
seats (continuous acoustic signal for only activated when any seat belt is
6 seconds followed by a 90 second unfastened (flashing red).
beep). The warning light will flash. In this condition, the warning light for
The warning lights will stay on the seat belt which has been
constantly at the end of the cycle until unfastened will flash (red) for
the engine is stopped. The acoustic approximately 30 seconds. An acoustic
signal will be interrupted immediately signal is also emitted.
when the drivers seat belt is fastened The visual indication (flashing red) will
and the warning light will turn green. start and stop independently for each
The reminder cycle (acoustic and visual) warning light if several seat belts are
will be repeated as described above unfastened. The warning light will
and the red warning light will flash if the become green when the relevant seat
seat belt is unfastened again while belt is fastened again.
travelling. The rear seat warning lights will switch
off, regardless of the state of the belt
Passenger (red or green) approximately 30
A similar situation applies to the front seconds after the last signal.
passenger, with the difference that the
warning light turns green and the
indication is also interrupted when the
passenger leaves the car.

130
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 131

PRETENSIONERS The pretensioner does not require any Seat belts must also be worn by
maintenance or lubrication: any pregnant women: the risk of injury in
The car is equipped with front seat belt changes to its original conditions will the event of an accident is reduced for
pretensioners, which draw back the invalidate its efficiency. If, due to them and the unborn child if they are
seat belts by several centimetres in the unusual natural events (floods, sea wearing a seat belt.
event of a violent frontal impact. This storms, etc.), the device has been Pregnant women must position the
guarantees the perfect adherence affected by water and/or mud, contact lower part of the belt very low down so
of the seat belts to the occupants an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have it that it passes over the pelvis and under
bodies before the restraining action replaced. the abdomen fig. 110.
begins.
It is evident that the pretensioners have LOAD LIMITERS
been activated when the belt withdraws To increase protection, the front seat
towards the reel. belt reels contain a load limiter which
The car is also equipped with a second controls the force acting on the chest
pretensioner (in the kick plate area). and shoulders during the belt
Its activation is signalled by the restraining action in the event of a
shortening of the metal cable. head-on collision.

A slight discharge of smoke may be 73)

produced during the activation of the 15)


110 A0K0250
pretensioner. This is not harmful and
does not indicate the start of a fire. GENERAL
INSTRUCTIONS FOR The belt must not be twisted. The
USING THE SEAT BELTS upper part must pass over the shoulder
IMPORTANT To obtain the highest
and cross the chest diagonally. The
degree of protection from the action of Respect and ensure that all the other
lower part must adhere to the pelvis fig.
the pretensioner, wear the seat belt occupants of the car respect the local
111, not to the abdomen of the
tight to the chest and pelvis. laws in force regarding the use of seat
occupant. Never use devices (clips,
belts. Always fasten the seat belts
clamps, etc.) to hold the seat belt away
before starting off.
from your body.
74) 75) 76)

131
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 132

SEAT BELT
SAFETY

MAINTENANCE
Always use the seat belt well
stretched and never twisted; make
sure that it is free to run without WARNING
obstructions;
replace the belt after an accident of a 73) The pretensioner may be used
certain severity even if it does not only once. After its activation,
appear to be damaged. Always contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership
111 A0K0012
replace the belt if the pretensioners to have it replaced.
were deployed; 74) Removing or otherwise
Each seat belt must be used by only tampering with pretensioner and
hand wash the seat belts with water
one person. Never travel with a child seat belt components is strictly
and neutral soap, rinse and leave to
sitting on a passengers lap and a single prohibited. Any operations on
dry in the shade. Never use strong
belt to protect them both fig. 112. In these components must be
detergents, bleach, paints or any
general, do not place any objects performed by qualified and
other substance which could authorised technicians. Always
between the person and belt.
damage the belt fibres; contact an Alfa Romeo
prevent the retractors from getting Dealership.
wet: their correct operation is only 75) For maximum protection, keep
guaranteed if water does not get the backrest upright, lean back
inside; into it and make sure the seat belt
replace the seat belt when there is fits closely across your chest
and pelvis. Always fasten the seat
wear or cuts.
belts for both the front and rear
seats! Travelling without wearing
seat belts will increase the risk
112 A0K0013 of serious injury and even death in
the event of an accident.

132
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 133

76) If the belt has been subjected to CARRYING The choice of the most suitable child
heavy strain, for example after an CHILDREN SAFELY restraint device depends on the weight
accident, it must changed of the child; there are various types of
completely together with the For optimal protection in the event of an child restraint systems and you are
anchors, anchor fastening screws impact, all occupants must be seated advised always to choose the one that
and the pretensioner. Even if the and wearing adequate restraint is most suitable for the child.
belt has no visible defects, it could systems, including newborn and other
have lost its resilience. When over 1.50 m in height, from the
children!
point of view of restraint systems,
This prescription is compulsory in all EC children are considered as adults and
countries according to EC Directive wear seat belts normally.
2003/20/EC.
In Europe the characteristics of children
Compared with an adult, a child's head restraint systems are ruled by the
IMPORTANT is larger and heavier in proportion to regulation ECE-R44, dividing them into
his/her body and the child's muscular five weight groups:
15) Operations which lead to and bone structures are not fully
impacts, vibrations or localised developed. Therefore, correct restraint
systems other than adult seat belts Group Weight groups
heating (over 100C for a
maximum of six hours) in the area are necessary to reduce as much as Group 0 up to 10 kg
around the pretensioner may possible the risk of injuries in case
damage or deploy it. Contact an of accident, braking or sudden Group 0+ up to 13 kg
Alfa Romeo Dealership should manoeuvre. Group 1 9-18 kg
intervention be necessary on
Children must be seated safely and
these components. Group 2 15-25 kg
comfortably. As far as the
characteristics of the child restraint Group 3 22-36 kg
systems used allow, you are advised to
keep children in rear facing restraint
systems for as long as possible (at least
until 34 years old), since this is the
most protected position in the event of
an impact. 77) 78)

133
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 134

All restraint devices must bear the 78) On the sun visor there is a label FITTING
SAFETY

type-approval data along with with suitable symbols UNIVERSAL CHILD


the control mark on a label firmly remembering that it is compulsory
secured to the child seat which must SEAT (with seat
to deactivate the airbag if a rear belts)
never be removed.
facing child restraint system is
Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo includes fitted. Always comply with the GROUP 0 and 0+
child restraint systems for each weight instructions on the passenger's
group. These devices are side sun visor (see the "Front 80)

recommended having been specifically airbag" paragraph). Infants up to 13 kg must be carried with
tested for Alfa Romeo cars. a child seat facing backwards of a
type as shown in fig. 113 which,
supporting the head, does not induce
stress on the neck in the event of
sudden decelerations.
The child seat is secured by the car
WARNING seat belts, as shown in fig. 113 and it
must restrain the child in turn with
77) SEVERE DANGER. When an its own belts.
active passenger airbag is fitted,
DO NOT install rear facing child
restraint systems on the front
seat. Deployment of the airbag in
an accident could cause fatal
injuries to the baby regardless of
the severity of the impact. It is
advisable to always carry children
in a child restraint system on the
rear seat, which is the most
protected position in the event of 113 A0K0014
a collision.

134
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 135

GROUP 1 In this case, the child restraint system is


79) 80)
used to position the child correctly
with respect to the seat belts so that
Children of weight from 9 to 18 kg may
the diagonal belt section crosses the
be carried in child seats facing forwards
childs chest and not the neck, and the WARNING
fig. 114.
lower part is snug on the pelvis not
the abdomen. 79) Child restraint systems with
Isofix attachments are available,
GROUP 3 which allow them to be secured to
80) the seat safely without using the
For children between 22 kg and 36 kg, car seat belts. See paragraph
"Isofix child restraint system
there are dedicated restraint systems
setup" for the fitting instructions.
that allow the seat belt to be worn
correctly. 80) The figure is indicative for fitting
purposes only. Fit the child
fig. 116 shows an example of correct restraint system according to the
114 A0K0129
child seat positioning on the rear seat. instructions, which must be
included.
GROUP 2
80)

Children from 15 to 25 kg may use the


car seat belts directly fig. 115.

116 A0K0017

Children over 1.50 m in height can wear


seat belts like adults.

115 A0K0016

135
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 136

SUITABILITY OF PASSENGER SEATS FOR UNIVERSAL CHILD SEAT USE


SAFETY

According to the European Directive 2000/3/EC the suitability of each passenger seat position for the fixing of universal child
seats is shown in the following table:

Rear (side and central)


Group Weight groups Front passenger's seat seats
Group 0, 0+ up to 13 kg U (*) U
Group 1 9-18 kg U (*) U
Group 2 15-25 kg U (*) U
Group 3 22-36 kg U (*) U

U (*)With height-adjustable seat, move the backrest to a vertical position.


U= Suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category, according to European Standard EEC-R44 for the specified "Groups".

136
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 137

PREPARATION FOR secure the upper belt (available


ISOFIX CHILD together with the child restraint
SEAT system) to the special attachments C
fig. 119 located in the rear part of
The car is equipped with ISOFIX the backrest.
anchorages, a new standard which
makes fitting a child seat quick, simple
and safe.
Isofix systems can be fitted alongside
conventional child seats on different
seats in the same car.
fig. 117 Shows an example of a
Universal Isofix child restraint system for
weight group 1. 81)

The other weight groups are covered 119 A0K0511

by specific Isofix child seats, which can


be used only if specifically tested for It is possible to have a mixed assembly
this car (see list of cars provided with of traditional child restraint system
the child seat). and Universal Isofix ones. Remember
117 A0K0018
that when using a Universal Isofix child
IMPORTANT The central rear seat is restraint system, you can only use
not approved for any type of Isofix child type-approved child restraint systems
seat. with the marking ECE R44 (R44/03
or superior) Universal Isofix.
INSTALLING A
UNIVERSAL ISOFIX The Universal Isofix Duo Plus child
CHILD SEAT seat and the special G 0/1 S seat are
Proceed as follows: available from Lineaccessori Alfa
Romeo.
attach the child restraint system to
the special lower metal rings B fig. 118 A0K0510 For any further installation/usage
118, located inside the rear seat details, refer to the Instruction Manual
backrest (to access the rings lift provided with the child restraint system.
hinge A); 82) 83) 84)

137
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 138

SUITABILITY OF PASSENGER SEATS FOR ISOFIX CHILD SEAT USE


SAFETY

The table below shows the various installation possibilities for Isofix child seats on seats fitted with Isofix attachments in
accordance with European standard ECE 16.

Child restraint system


Weight group position
Isofix size class Rear side seats

Group 0 up to 10 kg Facing backwards E IL (*)


Facing backwards E IL (*)
Group 0+ up to 13 kg Facing backwards D IL (*)
Facing backwards C IL (*)
Facing backwards D IL (*)
Facing backwards C IL (*)
Group 1 from 9 up to 18 kg Forward facing B IUF
Forward facing BI IUF
Forward facing A IUF

IL suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems of the categories for "specific vehicles", "restricted" or "semiuniversal"
(*) the Isofix child seat can be installed by adjusting the front seat
IUF: suitable for Isofix child seats to be positioned in forward facing position, universal class (fitted with third upper mounting), type-approved for the relevant weight
group.

138
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 139

Main recommendations Always check that the seat belts do 83) Fit the child restraint system only
to carry children safely not interfere with the child's throat. when the car is stationary. The
Install the child restraint systems Always check that the seat belt
child restraint system is correctly
on the rear seat, which is the most secured to the brackets when
is well fastened by pulling on it.
protected position in the event of an you hear the click. Follow the
accident. While travelling, do not let the child sit instructions for assembly,
incorrectly or unfasten the belts. disassembly and positioning that
Keep children in rear facing child the manufacturer must supply
restraint systems for as long as Never allow a child to put the belt's
with the child restraint system.
possible, until 2 years old. diagonal section under an arm or
behind their back. 84) Fit the child restraint system
Should a rear facing child restraint according to the instructions,
system be installed on the rear seats, Never carry children on your lap, which must be included.
it is advisable to position it as far even newborns. No-one can restrain
forward as the position of the front a child in the event of an accident.
seat allows. In the event of an accident, replace
If the front passenger airbag is the child restraint system with a
deactivated always check the new one.
permanent switching on of the
warning light in the trim above the
internal rearview mirror to make
sure that it has actually been
deactivated. WARNING
Carefully follow the instructions
supplied with the child restraint 81) The figure is indicative for fitting
system itself. Keep the instructions in purposes only. Fit the child
the car along with the other restraint system according to the
documents and this handbook. Do instructions, which must be
not use second-hand child restraint included.
systems without instructions. 82) If a Universal Isofix child
Only one child is to be strapped into restraint system is not fixed to all
three anchorages, it will not be
each restraint system; never carry
able to protect the child correctly.
two children simultaneously.
In a crash, the child could be
seriously or fatally injured.

139
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 140

FRONT AIRBAGS frontal impacts against highly FRONT PASSENGER


SAFETY

deformable objects not involving the AIRBAG


SMART BAG SYSTEM front surface of the car (e.g. wing This consists of an instantly inflating
(MULTISTAGE FRONT collision against guard rail, etc.); bag contained in a special recess in the
AIRBAGS)
jamming of the car underneath other dashboard fig. 121: this bag has a
The car features multistage front vehicles or protective barriers (e.g. larger volume than that of the driver's.
airbags (Smart bag) for driver and underneath a truck or a guard rail) as, 87)
passenger. in this case, the bags would offer no
The front (driver and passenger) airbags additional protection with respect
protect occupants in the event of to the seat belt and their deployment
head-on crashes of medium-high would be inappropriate. In these
severity, by placing the a cushion cases, non-deployment does not
between the occupant and the steering indicate a system malfunction.
wheel or dashboard.
FRONT DRIVER SIDE
Therefore non-deployment in other AIRBAG
types of impacts (side impacts, rear
This consists of an instantly inflating
shunts, roll-overs, etc.) does not 121 A0K0135
bag contained in a special
indicate a system malfunction.
compartment in the centre of the
Airbags are not a replacement of but steering wheel fig. 120. FRONT PASSENGER
complementary to the seat belts, which AIRBAG AND CHILD
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
you are recommended to always wear.
In the event of impact, those not 89)

wearing a seat belt are projected ALWAYS comply with the instructions
forwards and may come into contact on the label stuck on the passenger
with the bag which is still inflating. The side sun visor.
protection offered by the bag is
compromised in these circumstances.
85) 86) 88)

Front airbags may not activate in the


following situations: 120 A0K0364

140
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 141

Deactivating passenger
side airbags: front
airbag and side bag for
pelvis, chest and
shoulders protection
(Side bag)
If a child must be carried on the front
seat in a rear facing child restraint
system, deactivate the passenger side
front airbag and side bag for pelvis,
chest and shoulder protection (Side
bag).
With airbags deactivated, a warning
light lights up on the instrument
panel in the trim located above the
internal rearview mirror fig. 122.

122 A0K0660

141
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 142

FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG AND CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: WARNING


SAFETY

123 A0K0801

142
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 143

WARNING

85) Do not apply stickers or other objects on the steering wheel, on the dashboard in the passenger side airbag area, on
side upholstery on the roof or on the seats. Never put objects (e.g. mobile phones) on the passenger's side dashboard
since they could interfere with correct inflation of the airbag and also cause serious injury to the passengers.
86) Always drive keeping your hands on the steering wheel rim so that the airbag can inflate freely if necessary. Do not
drive with your body bent forward. Keep the back of your seat upright and lean back into it.
87) When an active passenger airbag is fitted, DO NOT install rear facing child restraint systems on the front seat.
Deployment of the airbag in an accident could cause fatal injuries to the child regardless of the severity of the
impact. Therefore, always deactivate the passenger airbag when a rear facing child restraint system is installed on
the front passenger seat. The front passenger seat must also be positioned back as far as possible in order to avoid
the child restraint system from coming into contact with the dashboard. Immediately reactivate the passenger airbag
as soon as the child restraint system has been removed.
88) To deactivate the airbags, see the Knowing your car section, Menu Items paragraph.
89) When an active passenger airbag is fitted, DO NOT install rear facing child restraint systems on the front seat.
Deployment of the airbag in an accident could cause fatal injuries to the child regardless of the severity of the
impact.

143
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 144

SIDE AIRBAGS (SIDE


SAFETY

BAGS - WINDOW
BAGS)
To increase protection of occupants in
case of side collision, the car is
equipped with front side bags for pelvis,
chest and shoulder protection (side
bags) for the driver and the passenger
and airbags protecting the head of front 125 A0K0035
and rear occupants (window bags).
Non-activation of side bags in other In the event of a side impact, the
types of collisions (head-on collisions, system provides optimum protection if
rear shunts, roll-overs, etc...) is not the passenger assumes the correct
an indication of system malfunction. position on the seat, thus allowing
correct window bag deployment.
FRONT SIDE AIRBAGS
(SIDE BAGS) 124 A0K0629
IMPORTANT
These comprise two types of bags Do not wash the seats with water or
It is designed to protect the head of
located in the front seat backrests fig. pressurised steam (by hand or at
front and rear occupants in the event of
124 which protect the pelvic, chest and automatic seat washing stations).
a side collision, thanks to the wide
shoulder area of the occupants in the
cushion inflation surface. The front and/or side bags may activate
event of a side impact of medium-high
severity. The deployment of side bags in the in the event of sharp knocks to the
event of side impacts of low severity is underbody of the car (e.g. impact with
SIDE AIRBAGS FOR not required. steps, pavements, potholes or road
HEAD PROTECTION bumps etc.).
(WINDOW BAGS) The airbags are not deployed in the
event of low-severity impacts (for which
This comprises two "curtain" bags the retaining action of the seat belts is
housed behind the roof side linings and sufficient). It is therefore always
covered by special trims fig. 125. necessary to wear seat belts.

144
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 145

When the airbag deploys it emits a 94) Do not travel holding objects on
small amount of dust: the dust is your lap, opposite the breast,
harmless and does not indicate the holding a pipe, pencil, etc. in your
beginning of a fire. The dust may irritate lips. Airbag deployment after a
the skin and eyes however: in this WARNING collision could cause serious
case, wash with neutral soap damage/injury.
and water. 90) Do not hook rigid objects to the 95) If the car has been subject to
coat hooks and to the support theft, attempted to theft,
Airbag checking, repair and
handles. vandalism or flooding, have the
replacement must be carried out at an
airbag system checked by an Alfa
Alfa Romeo Dealership. 91) Do not rest your head, arms or
Romeo Dealership.
If the car is scrapped, have the airbag elbows on the door, windows or
the area in which the window bag
system deactivated at an Alfa Romeo
is located to avoid possible injury
Dealership.
during inflation.
Pretensioners and airbags are deployed 92) Never lean your head, arms and
in different ways, according to the elbows out of the window.
type of impact. Failure to deploy of one
93) If the warning light does not
of the devices does not necessarily
switch on when the key is turned
indicate a system malfunction.
to MAR-ON, or stays on while
90) 91) 92) 93) 94) 95) 96) 97) 98) 99) driving (on some versions
together with a message on the
display) there may be a fault in the
restraint systems. In this case,
airbags or pretensioners may not
be activated in the case of an
accident or (in a lesser number of
cases) they may be activated
incorrectly. Before proceeding,
contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership
to have the system checked
immediately.

145
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 146

96) When the ignition key is in and 97) When the ignition key is turned
SAFETY

turned in the MAR-ON position to MAR-ON, the warning light


and the engine is off, the airbags turns on (front airbag on
may deploy if the car is crashed passenger's side enabled) and
by another moving vehicle. blinks for a few seconds to remind
Therefore, even if the car is that the passenger airbag will
stationary, when an active activate in the event of a collision.
passenger airbag is fitted, DO Then it turns off.
NOT install rear facing child 98) The front airbags deploy in the
restraint systems on the front event of more severe collisions
passenger seat. Deployment of than those required for deploying
the airbag following an impact the pretensioners. When the
could cause fatal injuries to the impact is between the two
child. Therefore, always deployment thresholds, it is
deactivate the passenger airbag normal that pretensioners only are
when a rear facing child restraint engaged.
system is installed on the front
99) The airbag does not replace seat
passenger seat. The front
belts, but increases their
passenger seat must also be
efficiency. Because front airbags
positioned back as far as possible
are not deployed for low-speed
in order to avoid the child
crashes, side collisions, rear-end
restraint system from coming into
shunts or rollovers, occupants are
contact with the dashboard.
protected, in addition to any side
Immediately reactivate the
bags, only by their seat belts,
passenger airbag as soon as the
which must therefore always be
child restraint system has been
fastened.
removed. Also remember that,
if the key is turned to STOP, none
of the safety devices (airbags or
pretensioners) will be deployed in
the event of a collision. Non-
deployment in such cases does
not indicate a system malfunction.

146
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 147

STARTING AND DRIVING

Lets get to the "heart" of the car: STARTING THE ENGINE ................148
seeing how you can exploit all of its PARKING ........................................149
potential to the full.
USING THE GEARBOX ...................150
Well look at how to drive it in any
situation, so that it can be a welcome ALFA TCT .......................................151
companion, with our comfort and SAVING FUEL .................................158
our wallets in mind.
TOWING TRAILERS ........................160
SNOW TYRES ................................160
SNOW CHAINS...............................161
STORING THE CAR ........................162

147
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 148

STARTING THE Never leave the ignition key at MAR do not demand full performance at
STARTING AND DRIVING

ENGINE when the engine is stopped. first. It is advisable to wait until the
engine coolant temperature indicator
PROCEDURE FOR PROCEDURE FOR DIESEL starts moving.
PETROL VERSIONS VERSIONS
Proceed as follows: Proceed as follows: STOPPING THE ENGINE

engage the handbrake and place the 19) Turn the ignition key to STOP while the
gear lever in neutral; engage the handbrake and place the engine is idling.

fully depress the clutch pedal, gear lever in neutral;


IMPORTANT After a demanding drive,
without touching the accelerator; turn the ignition key to MAR-ON: the before turning the engine off you should
turn the ignition key to AVV and warning lights and on the let it idle so that the temperature in the
release it as soon as the engine instrument panel will turn on (for engine compartment decreases.
starts. versions/markets, where provided);
wait for the warning lights to switch
IMPORTANT INFORMATION 100) 101) off;
102)
fully depress the clutch pedal,
16) 17) 18)
without touching the accelerator; WARNING
If the engine does not start at the first
turn the ignition key to AVV as soon
attempt, return the ignition key to
as warning light switches off. 100) It is dangerous to run the
STOP before repeating the starting
Waiting too long will waste the engine in enclosed areas. The
procedure.
heating work carried out by the glow engine takes in oxygen and
If, when the ignition key is at plugs. Release the key as soon as releases carbon dioxide, carbon
MAR-ON, the instrument panel the engine starts. monoxide and other toxic gases.
warning light (or the symbol on the
101) The brake servo is not active
display) stays on together with the WARMING UP THE until the engine is started, so
warning light, turn the key to ENGINE JUST AFTER IT
HAS STARTED you would need to apply much
STOP and then back to MAR-ON. If more force than usual to the
the warning light (or the symbol on Proceed as follows: brake pedal.
the display) remains on, try with
drive off slowly, letting the engine turn 102) Do not start the engine by
the other keys provided with the car.
at medium speed without pushing, towing or driving
Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership
accelerating abruptly; downhill. These manoeuvres may
if the engine still does not start. damage the catalytic converter.

148
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 149

PARKING To release it, raise lever A slightly, hold


down button B and lower the lever:
Always remove the ignition key when
the warning light on the instrument
leaving the car.
panel switches off.
IMPORTANT When parking and leaving the car,
103) 104)
proceed as follows:
16) In the first period of use, we engage a gear (1st gear if parked
recommend not to demand uphill or reverse if facing downhill)
maximum performance from the and leave the wheels turned;
car (for instance excessive
stop the engine and engage the
accelerations, extended travel at
maximum speed, sudden braking,
handbrake.
etc.). Block the wheels with a wedge or a
17) With the engine off, do not leave stone if the car is parked on a steep
the key in the ignition switch on slope.
MAR-ON to prevent draining On versions equipped with Alfa TCT 126 A0K0615
the battery. transmission, before releasing the brake
18) A quick burst on the accelerator pedal, wait for letter P to be displayed. IMPORTANT Carry out these
before turning off the engine manoeuvres with the brake pedal
serves absolutely no practical IMPORTANT NEVER leave the car pressed.
purpose; it wastes fuel and is with the gearbox in neutral (or, on
especially damaging to versions equipped with Alfa TCT IMPORTANT For cars equipped with a
turbocharged engines. transmission, before placing the gear front armrest, lift it up to ensure that
19) If the warning light flashes lever at P). it does not interfere with the action of
for about 1 minute after starting the handbrake.
or during prolonged cranking, this HANDBRAKE
indicates a fault in the glow plug To engage it, pull lever A fig. 126
preheating system. If the engine upwards until the car is secured.
starts, you may use the car
normally, but should contact an When the handbrake is engaged and
Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as the ignition key is at MAR-ON, the
possible. warning light will switch on in the
instrument panel.

149
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 150

USING THE
STARTING AND DRIVING

GEARBOX
To engage the gears, press the clutch
WARNING pedal fully and shift the gear lever WARNING
into one of the required positions (the
diagram for gear engagement is shown
103) Never leave children 105) Press the clutch pedal fully to
unattended in the car. Always
on the knob of the lever 105)).
change gears correctly. It is
remove the key from the ignition therefore essential that there is
device when leaving the car and nothing under the pedals: make
take it with you. sure the mats are lying flat and do
104) The car must be locked after a not get in the way of the pedals.
few clicks of the parking brake: if
this is not so, contact an Alfa
Romeo Dealership to have it
adjusted. Always park the car
safely as indicated by the
Highway Code and as described IMPORTANT
above. 127 A0K0616

20) Do not drive with your hand


To engage the 6th gear, operate the resting on the gear lever as the
lever by pressing it towards the right in force exerted, even if slight, could
order to avoid engaging the 4th gear lead over time to premature wear
by mistake. The same applies to the of the gearbox internal
shift from 6th to 5th gear. 20) components.
To engage reverse gear (R) from the
neutral position, lift up ring A fig. 127
and simultaneously move the lever
to the left and then forwards.

IMPORTANT Reverse can only be


engaged when the car is completely
stationary.

150
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 151

ALFA TCT DISPLAY


(for versions/markets, where provided) The display can show the following:
in automatic driving mode, the
IN BRIEF gear selected (P, R, N, D). With
lever in position D (Drive), the display
The car can be equipped with an will show D and the gear engaged
electronically managed Alfa TCT (e.g. D3 - see fig. 130).
6-speed automatic transmission
in sequential driving mode, the
where gearshifting takes place
128 - Left hand drive versions A0K0617 manual engagement of a (higher
automatically according to the
or lower) gear, with the relevant
instantaneous car usage parameters
number fig. 131;
(car speed, road gradient and
accelerator pedal position).
The new transmission is an absolute
innovation as it matches the
Start&Stop system with the most
recent alternative to traditional
automatic transmissions with built-in
torque converter.
129 - Right hand drive versions A0K0618
Manual gearshifting can still occur
thanks to the sequential mode
N = Neutral
position of the gear lever. 130 A0K1540

D = Drive, (automatic forward speed)


+ = Sequential upshifting
SELECTOR LEVER
= Sequential downshifting
The lever fig. 128 (left hand drive
versions) or fig. 129 (right hand drive If the lever is used in sequential mode,
versions), can be placed in the following moving the latter from D to the left,
positions: the positions towards + or are
unstable.
P = Park
The lever has a button A, which must
R = Reverse be pressed to move the lever to P or R. 131 A0K1541

151
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 152

POSITIONS OF THE Shifting from N to D is free, while


STARTING AND DRIVING

LEVER shifting from N to R or P can only be


made by the button on the gear lever.
Park (P)
Position P corresponds to the neutral Drive (D) - Automatic
position of the transmission and locks forward gear
drive wheels mechanically. It is the lever position in standard
It should only be engaged with the car running conditions.
stationary and the handbrake should be Shifting from D to N is free, while
applied, if necessary. 132 A0K0619
shifting from D to R or P can only be
With the ignition key at MAR-ON or with made by the button on the gear lever.
IMPORTANT NEVER leave the car
engine running, or when the engine
before having positioned the selector Sequential mode (+ / )
switches off, if the gear lever is not
lever in P.
correctly positioned in P, letter P starts Shifting the lever from position D on
flashing on the gear lever trim. side in stable position, the transmission
Reverse (R)
In this case, move the lever correctly to is used in sequential mode.
position P. 21)
The engine cannot be started with the
lever in position R. Shifting the lever in unstable position (+
The ignition key can be removed only or ) gears are changed.
when the lever is in position P. Moving Shifting from R to N or D is free, while
the lever from P to D must be shifting from R to P can be made by the Important information
performed only when the car is button on the gear lever, with engine
stationary and the engine at idling at idling speed. 22) IMPORTANT All movements of the gear
speed. lever must be performed with car
Neutral (N) stationary and engine idling only.
Shifting from P to any other position of
the selector lever, with ignition key in It corresponds to neutral for a standard The drive wheels are mechanically
MAR-ON position, must be made manual gearbox. The engine can be locked in position P.
pressing the brake pedal and using the started with the lever in position N.
Shifting from P to R is possible with
button on the gear lever (see paragraph Engage N in case of prolonged stops. brake pedal pressed and button on
"Selector lever"). gear lever pressed.
To move the lever from position N,
If the battery is flat, to release the lever release the accelerator and make sure Shifting from R to N and from N to D is
you need to remove the gaiter and the engine is stable at idling speed. free.
operate the lever A fig. 132.

152
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 153

Shifting from D to "Sequential mode" is The engine restarts automatically if: ENGINE SWITCHING OFF
free. the brake pedal is released (and the Engine can be switched off in any
Shifting from "Sequential mode" to D is lever is not at N or P) position of the gear lever.
free. the lever is shifted to an unstable
Shifting from D to N is free. position: +, or R Versions with
Start&Stop system
Shifting from N to R is possible only the lever is shifted from D to the left
To switch the engine off, you need to
with button on gear lever pressed. in "Sequential mode"
stop the car by pressing the brake
Shifting from R to P is possible only by the "+" or "" paddles on the pedal properly; if the pressure is not
with button on gear lever pressed. steering wheel (for versions/markets, enough, the engine will not be switched
where provided) off.
STARTING THE ENGINE
During the engine stop and start This feature can be exploited so that
Starting is only permitted with gear sequence, the system passes through the engine does not switch off in
lever in position P or N (with or without the automatic engagement of neutral: particular traffic conditions.
brake pedal pressed). the display shows N.
On starting, the system is at N or P (the Ignition key removal
IMPORTANT In some conditions (for
latter means neutral, but with the cars The ignition key can be removed only if
example with small gradients and brake
wheels locked mechanically). the gear lever is in position P:
pedal not fully depressed), engine
Start&Stop system
switching off is not deactivated. In this if the engine is switched off with the
case, fully depress the brake pedal gear lever in position P: the ignition
With car at a standstill and Start&Stop to make the "Hill Holder" function key can be removed within 30
system activated, the engine switches available and restart the engine, using seconds;
off if the gear lever is in a position the gear lever or the paddles on the
other than R. if the engine is switched off with the
steering wheel (for versions/markets,
gear lever in a position other than P:
The Start&Stop system does not where provided) as described
the P letter on the display and on
operate when the gear lever is in R, for previously.
the gear lever trim flashes for 5
making parking manoeuvres easier. seconds and an acoustic signal will
In the event of stops uphill, the engine be emitted at the same time. Move
switching off is disabled to activate the lever to P within 5 seconds; then
the "Hill Holder" function (works only it will be possible to remove the
with running engine). ignition key for about 30 seconds.

153
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 154

In both cases, if the described MOVING THE CAR If, with 1st gear or reverse (R) engaged,
STARTING AND DRIVING

conditions and times are not respected, To move the car, from P press the the following conditions occur:
the ignition key will be automatically brake pedal and, using the button on road slope over 5%;
locked. the gear lever, move the lever to the clutch overheated;
To remove the key, turn it to MAR-ON desired position (D, R or "Sequential
and then to STOP. mode"). engine torque constant for a given
period (e.g. if the car hits the
IMPORTANT If the battery is flat and the The display will show the gear pavement or is parked downhill/
ignition key is engaged, the latter is engaged. uphill);
locked in position. To remove the key When the brake pedal is released, the
manually, pull up the handbrake and car movement is achieved by pressing
car starts moving forwards or the accelerator pedal.
insert the screwdriver supplied in the backwards, as soon as the manoeuvre
hole under the dashboard fig. 133 is activated ("creeping" effect). The IMPORTANT With handbrake released
pressing slightly, until the key is accelerator should not be pressed in and brake pedal released, engine at
removed. this case. idling speed and gear lever in position
D, R or sequential, pay the utmost care
IMPORTANT The inconsistency because the car can move even
between the speed actually engaged without the operation of the accelerator
(shown on the display) and the position pedal. This condition can be used
of the gear lever is indicated by the with the car on a level surface during
letter corresponding to the position of tight parking manoeuvres using the
the lever flashing on the trim (also brake pedal only.
accompanied by an acoustic signal).
This condition should not be interpreted AUTOMATIC DRIVING
as an operational fault, but simply as a MODE
133 A0K0254
request by the system to repeat the D can be selected from sequential
manoeuvre. operation in any driving conditions.

IMPORTANT With engine running and In automatic driving mode, the best
car stationary, in "Sequential mode", ratio is selected by the electronic
the request for engaging 2nd gear is not transmission control unit depending on
accepted by the system (whether the speed, engine load (accelerator pedal
brake pedal is pressed or not). position) and gradient of the road.

154
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 155

Kick-Down function Natural: gear changes at low Gearshifting through


engine speeds. It enhances comfort gear lever
To resume speed quickly, when the
accelerator pedal is pressed fully, the and reduces consumption; Move the lever sideways (to the left)
transmission control system downshifts All Weather: driving programme on from position D to the sequential
("Kick-down" function). roads with poor grip (e.g. snow, ice, position:
mud, etc.). lever towards "+": engage higher
IMPORTANT When driving on roads gear;
with poor grip conditions (snow, ice, Gearshifting suggestion
etc.) avoid activating the kick-down lever towards "": engage lower gear.
function. With the transmission in automatic
The lever correct position in "Sequential
mode (selector lever in position D),
mode" is signalled when the symbols
when gearshifting is required by the
Integration with "Alfa "+" and "" switch on and the symbol D
DNA" system paddles on the steering wheel (for
switches off on the display (the gear
versions/markets, where provided), the
Operating the Alfa DNA system fig. engaged only is shown on the display).
system shifts to "Sequential mode",
134, three different driving modes can with relevant displaying of the gear
be selected: Gearshifting through
engaged, for about 5 second. steering wheel paddles
When this time has elapsed, if the (for versions/markets, where provided)
paddles are not operated anymore, the On some versions, the steering wheel
system goes back to the automatic paddles can be used to change gear
mode (D), with following displaying. fig. 135. 106)

SEQUENTIAL DRIVING
MODE
In sequential driving mode, the
transmission works like a manual
134 A0K0612
gearbox.

Dynamic: gear changes at higher


engine speeds. It enhances sporty
driving;
135 A0K0266

155
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 156

To use the paddles on the steering The engagement of a lower or higher When the brake pedal is released, the
STARTING AND DRIVING

wheel, the gear lever must be in gear is only permitted if the engine revs car will start with maximum
"Sequential mode" or in D: allow it. acceleration. Despite the "Sequential
steering wheel paddle "+" (pulling If the car is stopped with a higher gear mode", the car will autonomously shift
paddle towards driver fig. 136): than 1st engaged, the transmission the gear to guarantee max.
engage higher gear; will automatically engage 1st gear. acceleration, once the correct shifting
speed has been reached.
steering wheel paddle "-" (pulling
paddle towards driver fig. 136): "Launch Control" 108)
Function To abandon the strategy, simply
engage lower gear.
The "Launch Control" strategy permits interrupt the above sequence
high-performance starting. of operations or release the accelerator
pedal.
With the car stationary, proceed as
follows to activate this function:
ACOUSTIC SIGNAL
operate the Alfa DNA system and
For safety reasons, an acoustic signal is
activate the "Dynamic" driving mode;
heard when:
depress the brake pedal with your left
the driver's side door is opened with
foot and, simultaneously, fully
engine running and the gear lever is
depress the accelerator pedal with
in a position other than P;
136 A0K0269 your right foot;
engine is switched off with gear lever
shift gear using the gear lever or the
in a position other than P.
steering wheel paddle "" (pulling
the paddle towards the driver as With the car stationary, the engine
previously described): rpm are thus started and (1st), (D) or (R) gear
increased from 2500 to 4500; engaged, the system activates the
acoustic signal and automatically
release the brake pedal: in this way a
places the transmission in neutral (N)
more "lively" start is achieved.
when:
the accelerator and/or brake pedals
137 A0K0271
are not pressed for at least 3 minutes
with creeping deactivated (for
example with handbrake engaged);

156
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 157

the brake pedal is pressed for longer TOWING THE CAR If reverse (R) is engaged, only engage
than 10 minutes; Make sure that the transmission is in the 1st gear (or vice versa) when the car
the driver's door is opened with neutral (N), checking that the car moves is completely stopped.
creeping deactivated (for example when pushed, and proceed in the Although it is highly inadvisable, if you
with handbrake engaged) without same way as for towing a normal car are driving downhill and, for unexpected
pressing brake and/or accelerator with a manual gearbox. reasons, you let the car move forward
pedals; with the transmission in neutral (N),
IMPORTANT If the transmission cannot when there is a request to engage
a fault has been detected in the
be put in neutral (N), do not tow the a gear, depending on the speed of the
transmission.
car and contact an Alfa Romeo car, the system will automatically
IMPORTANT Shifting to neutral (N) - Dealership. Should the lever be in P, engage the best gear for the correct
operated by the system - involves release it before towing (see paragraph transmission of drive torque to the
a situation of inconsistency between "Positions of the lever"). wheels. 107)

gear lever position and gear engaged.


IMPORTANT
The manoeuvre is accompanied by INFORMATION
an acoustic inconsistency signal. This
acoustic signal continues until the gear With car stationary and gear engaged,
lever is placed in P or N, to restore always keep the brake pedal pressed
the correct transmission operation until you decide to set off, then release IMPORTANT
conditions. the brake and accelerate gradually.
During prolonged stops with the engine 21) If the car is on a gradient, always
PARKING THE CAR running, it is advisable to keep the pull the handbrake BEFORE
To park safely, with the brake pedal transmission in neutral (N). placing the gear lever in P.
pressed, P must be engaged and, in To protect the clutch, never use the 22) Engage reverse only with the car
case of parking uphills/downhills, the accelerator to keep the car stationary stationary, engine at idling speed
handbrake must be engaged. (for example when stopped uphills/ and accelerator fully released.
Before releasing the brake pedal, wait downhills): clutch overheating could
until P appears on the display. damage it. Use the brake pedal instead
or the handbrake and only press the
IMPORTANT NEVER leave the car accelerator pedal when you wish to set
before having positioned the lever in P. off.

157
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 158

SAVING FUEL Roof rack/ski rack


STARTING AND DRIVING

Remove the roof rack or the ski rack


Here are some suggestions which can
from the roof after use. These
help you to save fuel and lower harmful
accessories lower aerodynamic
WARNING emissions.
penetration and adversely affect
GENERAL consumption levels. When transporting
106) Using the levers incorrectly CONSIDERATIONS particularly large objects, use a trailer
(levers pushed towards the if possible.
dashboard, see fig. 137) could Car maintenance
break them. Electrical devices
Checks and adjustments should be
107) Never leave children
carried out in accordance with the Use the electrical devices only for the
unattended in the car. Always
Scheduled Servicing Plan (see necessary amount of time. The heated
remove the ignition key when
leaving the car and take the key
chapter Maintenance and care). rear window, additional headlights,
with you. screen wipers and heater fan require a
Tyres considerable amount of energy;
108) The Launch control function is
increasing the current uptake increases
only available in Dynamic mode. Check the tyre pressures at least once
fuel consumption (by up to +25% in
Regardless of what is explicitly every four weeks: if the pressure is
an urban cycle).
indicated in the description of too low, consumption levels increase as
these modes, the ESC and ASR resistance to rolling is higher.
systems are deactivated during Climate control system
operation of the Launch Control Unnecessary loads Using the climate control system will
function. This means that vehicle increase consumption: use the air vents
dynamic control is the sole Do not travel with an overloaded boot.
when the temperature outside permits.
responsibility of the driver. The weight of the car and its
Therefore pay the utmost arrangement greatly affect fuel
consumption and stability. Devices for
attention when using the Launch aerodynamic control
Control. Take into account traffic
and road surface conditions and The use of non-certified devices for
during manoeuvres make sure aerodynamic control may adversely
there is enough room in the area affect air drag and fuel consumption.
concerned.

158
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 159

DRIVING STYLE Maximum speed Traffic and road


conditions
Fuel consumption considerably
Starting High fuel consumption is caused by
increases as speed increases. Maintain
Do not warm up the engine at low or a constant speed, avoiding heavy traffic, for instance when
high revs when the car is stationary; unnecessary braking and acceleration, travelling in a queue with frequent use
this causes the engine to warm up which cost in terms of both fuel of low gears or in large towns with
more slowly, thereby increasing fuel consumption and emissions. many traffic lights. Winding mountain
consumption and emissions. It is roads and rough road surfaces also
therefore advisable to move off Acceleration adversely affect consumption.
immediately, slowly, avoiding high
Accelerating violently severely affects
speeds: in this way the engine will Stops in traffic
consumption and emissions:
warm up more quickly. During prolonged hold-ups (e.g. level
acceleration should be gradual and
should not exceed the maximum crossings) switch off the engine.
Unnecessary actions
torque.
Avoid accelerating when stopped at
traffic lights or before switching off the CONDITIONS OF USE
engine. The latter action, as well as
double-declutching, is unnecessary and Cold starting
causes increased fuel consumption Short distances and frequent cold
and pollution. start-ups will prevent the engine from
reaching optimal running temperature.
Gear selection This results in a significant increase
Use a high gear when traffic and road in consumption levels (from +15 to
conditions allow it. Using a low gear for +30% on the urban cycle) and
faster acceleration will increase fuel emissions.
consumption. In the same way
improper use of a high gear increases
consumption, emissions and engine
wear.

159
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 160

TOWING TRAILERS INSTALLING A TOW SNOW TYRES


STARTING AND DRIVING

HOOK
IMPORTANT Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership to Use snow tyres of the same size as the
The vehicle must be provided with a install a tow hook. 109) 110)
normal tyres provided with the car:
type-approved tow hook and adequate the Alfa Romeo Dealership will be able
electrical system to tow caravans or to advise you on the most appropriate
trailers. Installation must be carried out tyre to use.
by a specialist. Only use these tyres in the event of ice
Fit any specific and/or additional rear or snow on the roads. 111)
WARNING
view mirrors as specified by the For the type of tyre to be used, inflation
Highway Code. pressures and the specifications of
109) The ABS with which the car is snow tyres, follow the instructions given
Remember that when towing a trailer, equipped will not control the in the "Wheels" paragraph in the
steep hills are harder to climb, the braking system of the trailer. "Technical specifications" chapter.
braking spaces increase and overtaking Particular caution is therefore
takes longer depending on the overall required when travelling on The winter performance of these tyres
weight. slippery roads. is considerably reduced when the tread
110) Never modify the braking thickness is less than 4 mm. Replace
Engage a low gear when driving
system of the car to control the them in this case.
downhill, rather than constantly using
the brake. trailer brake. The trailer braking Due to the specific characteristics of
system must be fully independent snow tyres, in normal weather
The weight of the trailer reduces the from the hydraulic system of the conditions or on long motorway
load capacity of the car by the same car. journeys, the performance of these
amount. Consider the weight at full
tyres is lower than that of standard
load, including accessories and
tyres. Their usage should therefore be
luggage, to make sure you do not
restricted in accordance with their
exceed the maximum towable weight
type approval.
(shown in the registration document).
All four tyres should be the same (brand
Do not exceed the speed limits specific
and track) to ensure greater safety
to each country you are driving in, in
when driving and braking as well as
the case of vehicles towing trailers.
making the car more responsive. It is
In any case do not exceed 100 km/h.
inadvisable to change the rotation
direction of tyres.

160
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 161

SNOW CHAINS
The use of snow chains should be in
compliance with local regulations.
WARNING Snow chains can be fitted to the tyres IMPORTANT
of the front wheels (drive wheels) only.
111) The maximum speed for snow Check the tension of the snow chains 23) Keep your speed down when
tyres marked Q is 160 km/h, after the first few metres have been snow chains are fitted; do not
while it is 190 km/h for T tyres driven. exceed 50 km/h. Avoid potholes,
and 210 km/h for "H" tyres. The steps and pavements and avoid
Use low-clearance snow chains: on all
highway code speed limits must driving for long distances on
versions, for 195/55 R16", 205/55 R16"
however always be complied with. roads not covered with snow to
and 225/45 R17" size tyres use
prevent damaging the car and the
low-clearance snow chains with a
road surface.
maximum projection beyond the tyre
profile of 9 mm. 23)

IMPORTANT The space-saver wheel


cannot be fitted with snow chains. If a
front (drive) wheel is punctured and
snow chains must be used, you must
remove a normal wheel from the rear
axle and replace it with the space-saver
wheel. In this way, with two normal
drive wheels, it is possible to use snow
chains.

161
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 162

STORING THE CAR cover the car with a cloth or


STARTING AND DRIVING

perforated plastic sheet. Do not use


If the car is to be left inactive for longer compact plastic sheets which do
than a month, the following precautions not allow humidity to evaporate from
should be noted: the surface of the car.
park the car in covered, dry and if inflate tyres to +0.5 bar above the
possible well-ventilated premises and standard prescribed pressure and
slightly open the windows; check it periodically;
check that the handbrake is not do not drain the engine cooling
engaged; system;
disconnect the negative battery Any time the car is left inactive for
terminal and check the battery two weeks or more, operate the
charge. Repeat this check once air conditioning system with engine
every three months during storage; idling for at least 5 minutes, setting
if the battery is not disconnected external air and with fan at maximum
from the electrical system, checks its speed. This operation will ensure a
state of charge every thirty days; suitable lubrication to minimise
possibility of damage to the
clean and protect the painted parts
compressor when the system is
using protective wax;
operated again.
clean and protect the shiny metal
parts using special compounds IMPORTANT After turning the ignition
available commercially; key to STOP, wait at least 1 minute
before disconnecting the electrical
sprinkle talcum powder on the
supply to the battery.
windscreen and rear window wiper
rubber blades and lift them off the
glasses;
slightly open the windows;

162
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 163

IN AN EMERGENCY

A punctured tyre or a burnt-out bulb? STARTING THE ENGINE .................164


At times, a problem may interfere REPLACING A WHEEL ...................165
with our journey. "FIX&GO AUTOMATIC" KIT .............170
The pages on emergencies can help CHANGING A BULB .......................173
you to deal with critical situations
independently and with calm. REPLACING EXTERIOR BULBS......177
In an emergency we recommend that INTERIOR BULB REPLACEMENT ...180
you call the freephone number found in REPLACING FUSES........................181
the Warranty Booklet.
BATTERY RECHARGING ................191
It is also possible to call the 00 800
2532 4200 freephone number to RAISING THE CAR..........................192
search the nearest Alfa Romeo TOWING THE CAR .........................192
Authorised Network.

163
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 164

STARTING THE
IN AN EMERGENCY

ENGINE
Contact the Alfa Romeo Dealership
immediately if the warning light IMPORTANT
stays on constantly on the
instrument panel.
24) Do not connect the negative
terminals of the two batteries
JUMP STARTING
directly! If the auxiliary battery is
If the battery is flat, start the engine installed on another car, prevent
using an auxiliary battery with the same accidental contact between
capacity or a little higher than the flat metallic parts of the two cars.
one. 24) 25) 112) 25) Never use a fast battery charger
Proceed as follows to start the car: to start the engine as this could
damage the electronic systems
connect the positive terminal (+) fig.
and the ignition and engine fuel
138 of the auxiliary battery only to
supply control units.
the point indicated on the car battery
(writing OK) and nowhere else;
with a second lead, connect the 138 A0K0247
negative terminal ( ) of the auxiliary
battery to an earthing point on If after a few attempts the engine does
the engine or the gearbox/ not start, contact the Alfa Romeo WARNING
transmission of the car to be started; Dealership.
start the engine; when the engine has 112) This procedure must be
been started, remove the leads BUMP STARTING performed by qualified personnel
reversing the order above. as incorrect actions may cause
Never jump start the engine by pushing,
high-intensity electrical discharge.
For versions with Start&Stop system, in towing or coasting downhill. Furthermore, battery fluid is
case of starting by auxiliary battery, poisonous and corrosive: avoid
refer to the paragraph Start&Stop contact with skin and eyes. Keep
system in the chapter Getting to know naked flames away from the
your car. battery. No smoking. Do not cause
sparks.

164
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 165

REPLACING A stop the car in a position that is not


WHEEL dangerous for oncoming traffic
where you can change the wheel
GENERAL safely. The ground should be flat
INSTRUCTIONS if possible, and sufficiently firm;
The car is equipped with the Fix&Go switch off the engine, pull up the
Automatic Kit: see the paragraph handbrake and engage the 1st gear
Fix&Go Automatic Kit for how to use or reverse. Wear the reflective safety
this device. jacket (compulsory by law) before
As an alternative to the Fix&Go getting out of the car; 140 A0K0649

Automatic Kit the car may be open the luggage compartment, pull
requested with a space-saver wheel: tab A fig. 139 and lift up the mat; take the wrench A fig. 141 and
see the instructions on the following loosen the fixing bolts by about one
pages for changing the wheel. turn. For versions with alloy rims,
shake the car to facilitate detachment
113) 114) 115) 116) 117)
of the rim from the wheel hub.
JACK
Please note that:
the jack weight is 1.76 kg;
the jack requires no adjustment;
the jack cannot be repaired and in
139 A0K0648
the event of a fault it must be
replaced by another original one;
using wrench A fig. 140 positioned in
no tool other than its cranking device the tool box, loosen the locking
may be fitted on the jack. device, take the tool box B and place 141 A0K0650

To change a wheel, proceed as follows: it close to the wheel to be replaced,


then take the space-saver wheel C; position the jack under the car, near
the wheel to be changed. On
versions where this is fitted, be
careful not to damage the plastic
aerodynamic guard;

165
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 166

operate the device A fig. 142 so as to fit handle D into the housing in device
IN AN EMERGENCY

extend the jack, until the upper part A, operate the jack and raise the car
B fig. 143 is inserted correctly inside until the wheel is a few centimetres
the side member C; from the ground;
for versions with wheel cap, remove
the wheel cap after loosening the 4
fastening bolts and finally loosen
the fifth bolt and extract the wheel;
make sure the contact surfaces
144 A0K0040
between space-saver wheel and hub
are clean so that the fastening bolts
Restore the standard wheel as soon as
will not come loose;
possible, because, once placed in the
fit the space-saver wheel by inserting associated compartment, the luggage
142 A0K0651 the first bolt for two threads into the compartment load platform is rendered
hole closest to the valve; uneven as the standard wheel is larger
take the wrench A fig. 140 and fully than the spare wheel. 26)

tighten the fixing bolts;


REMOVING THE
operate the jack handle D to lower SUBWOOFER (versions
the car. Then extract the jack; with Bose HI-FI system)
(for versions/markets, where provided)
use the wrench A provided to fully
tighten the bolts in a criss-cross IMPORTANT The following procedure
fashion as per the numerical only applies to cars equipped with
sequence illustrated in fig. 144; Bose HI-FI systems with subwoofer (for
143 A0K0652
versions/markets, where provided).
when replacing an alloy wheel it is
alert any bystander that the car is advisable to place it upside down,
about to be raised; all persons with the aesthetic part facing
should be kept away from the car upwards.
and nobody must touch it until it has
been lowered;

166
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 167

Subwoofer and space- Proceed as follows to remove the reposition the subwoofer wire
saver spare wheel subwoofer: correctly to avoid pinching it. Then
On these versions, the tools needed for open the luggage compartment, pull fasten the clip B and fasten the
changing the wheel are arranged in a tab A fig. 147, lift the mat upwards blocking device A. Finally, position
specific container on the left-hand side and remove the load compartment the load compartment shim correctly
of the luggage compartment (see fig. shim; and lower the luggage compartment
145). mat.
reposition the subwoofer correctly
(see indications on the label applied
over the subwoofer itself), so that the
word BOSE is positioned in the
right direction for reading;
reposition the subwoofer wire
correctly to avoid pinching it. Then
fasten the clip B and fasten the
blocking device A. Finally, position
147 A0K0654
the load compartment shim fig. 145
145 A0K0235
correctly and lower the luggage
loosen the fastening device A, compartment mat.
The jack is located in a pocket, again
remove the clip B fastening the cable
on the left-hand side of the luggage
and then lift the subwoofer; Subwoofer and "Fix&Go
compartment (see fig. 146).
rest the subwoofer on the side of the Automatic Kit"
luggage compartment and take the Locating the Automatic Fix&Go Kit:
space-saver wheel;
open the luggage compartment, pull
replace the wheel as described tab A and lift the mat;
previously.
take the Fix&Go Automatic Kit
At the end of the operation: located on the left side of the luggage
reposition the subwoofer correctly compartment (see fig. 148);
(see indications on the label applied inflate the wheel (see paragraph
over the subwoofer itself), so that the entitled Fix&Go Automatic Kit).
146 A0K0228 word BOSE is positioned in the
right direction for reading;

167
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 168

lower the car and remove the jack;


IN AN EMERGENCY

use wrench A to fully tighten the


bolts, following the sequence
illustrated in fig. 144
WARNING
At the end of operation
113) The space-saver wheel is
Proceed as follows:
specific for your car. Do not use it
stow the space-saver wheel in the on cars of different models. Do
148 A0K0178 compartment provided in the luggage not use space-saver wheels of
compartment; different models on your car. The
IMPORTANT If you need to remove the space-saver wheel must only be
insert the jack and the other tools in
subwoofer, follow the indications shown used in the event of emergency. It
the container;
on the adhesive label fig. 148 over the must only be used for the
subwoofer itself to reposition it arrange the container and tools on distance necessary to reach a
correctly. the space-saver wheel; service point and the car speed
must not exceed 80 km/h. The
correctly reposition the luggage
REFITTING THE WHEEL space-saver wheel has an orange
compartment mat.
label that summarises the main
Following the procedure described cautions for use and limitations.
previously, raise the car and remove the Never remove or cover the label.
space-saver wheel. Never apply any hub cap to the
Proceed as follows: space-saver wheel.
114) Use your hazard lights, warning
make sure the contact surfaces
triangle, etc to show that your car
between standard wheel and hub are
is stationary. Passengers should
clean so that the fastening bolts will
get out of the car, particularly if it
not come loose;
is heavily loaded, and wait for
for versions with steel rims: fix the the wheel to be changed away
hub cap on the rim, aligning the from the traffic. In the event of a
crescent hole with the bolt you have wheel change on a slope or on
fitted, then insert the other 4 bolts; unsurfaced roads, chock the
wheels.
tighten the retaining bolts using
wrench A fig. 139;

168
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 169

115) Car handling is modified with 116) Use the jack only to replace
the space-saver wheel fitted. wheels on the car with which it
Avoid violent acceleration and is supplied or on other cars of the
braking, abrupt steering and fast same model. Never use the jack
cornering. The overall duration for other purposes, such as lifting IMPORTANT
of the space-saver wheel is of other car models. Never use it
about 3000 km, after which the for repair operations under the
26) Contact an Alfa Romeo
relevant tyre must be replaced car. Incorrect positioning of the
Dealership as soon as possible to
with another one of the same jack may cause the car to fall. Do
have the correct tightening of
type. Never install a traditional not use the jack for loads higher
the wheel bolts checked.
tyre on a rim designed to be used than those shown on the label.
as a space-saver wheel. Have Never install snow chains on the
the wheel repaired and refitted as space-saver wheel; if a front tyre
soon as possible. Using two or (driving wheel) is punctured and
more space-saver wheels at the you need to use snow chains, use
same time is forbidden. Do not a standard wheel from the rear
grease the bolt threads before you axle and install the space-saver
fit them, because they could wheel on the rear axle. In this
suddenly come loose. way, with two normal front drive
wheels, it is possible to use snow
chains.
117) Incorrect hub cap assembly
may cause it to come off when the
car is moving. Never tamper with
the inflation valve. Never
introduce tools of any kind
between rim and tyre. Regularly
check the inflation pressure of the
tyres and space-saver wheel
(see chapter "Technical
specifications").

169
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 170

"Fix&Go Automatic" bottle A fig. 150 containing sealant


IN AN EMERGENCY

kit and fitted with: filling tube B and


adhesive label C with the wording
This is located in the luggage max. 80 km/h to be placed in
compartment (the kit container may a clearly visible position (e.g. on the
vary according to version - see fig. dashboard) after repairing the tyre;
149).

151 A0K0517

IMPORTANT The sealing liquid is


suitable for use at temperatures in the
range from 20C to +50C. The
sealant has an expiry date.

150 A0K0516 INFLATION PROCEDURE


120) 122) 123) 124) 125) 126)
a compressor D complete with
pressure gauge and connectors; Proceed as follows:

an information leaflet fig. 151, engage the handbrake, unscrew the


providing instructions for using the kit tyre valve cap, take out filler hose A
correctly. This booklet should be fig. 152 and tighten ring nut B on the
given to the persons charged with tyre valve;
handling the tyre treated with this kit; make sure that switch A for the
a pair of gloves located in the side compressor is in position 0 (off), start
compartment of the compressor; the engine, insert the plug into the
149 A0K0515 luggage compartment power socket
adapters for inflating different (see fig. 154) or on central tunnel
The kit also contains a screwdriver and elements. (see fig. 155) and switch on the
a tow hook. 2) compressor by bringing switch A to
The kit also contains: 118) 119) 121)
position I (on);

170
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 171

after having driven for about 10


minutes, stop and recheck the tyre
pressure; remember to engage
the handbrake;
if a pressure value of at least 1.8 bar
is detected, restore the correct
pressure (with the engine running and
the handbrake engaged), resume
driving and drive with great care to an
152 A0K0518 155 A0K0128
Alfa Romeo Dealership.

inflate the tyre to the pressure CHECKING AND


indicated in the Wheels paragraph RESTORING TYRE
in the Technical data chapter. In PRESSURE
order to obtain a more precise The compressor can also be used to
reading, check the pressure value on check and, if necessary, adjust the tyre
pressure gauge B fig. 153 with the pressure.
compressor off;
Release quick coupling A fig. 157 and
if after five minutes it is still impossible connect it directly to the valve of the
to reach at least 1.8 bar, disengage tyre to be inflated.
153 A0K0519
the compressor from the valve and
power socket, then move the car
forwards by approx. ten metres
in order to distribute the sealing fluid
inside the tyre evenly, then repeat
the inflation operation;
if you still cannot obtain a pressure of
at least 1.8 bar within 5 minutes from
the compressor switching on, do
not drive off and contact an Alfa
154 A0K0520
Romeo Dealership; 156 A0K0521

171
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 172

REPLACING THE BOTTLE


IN AN EMERGENCY

Proceed as follows:
release coupling A fig. 157 and
disconnect tube B; IMPORTANT WARNING
turn the bottle to be replaced
anticlockwise and raise it; 27) In the event of a puncture 118) Give the booklet to the
caused by foreign bodies, the kit technicians who will be handling
may be used to repair tyres the tyre that was treated using
showing damages on the tread or the "Fix&Go Automatic" kit.
shoulder up to max. 4 mm 119) Punctures on the sides of the
diameter. tyre may not be repaired. Do not
use the kit if the tyre is damaged
due to travelling when flat.
120) Wear the protective gloves
provided with the kit.
121) Apply the adhesive label where
157 A0K0041
it can be easily seen by the driver
IMPORTANT
as a reminder that the tyre has
fit the new bottle and turn it been treated with the quick repair
2) Dispose of the bottle and the
clockwise; kit. Drive carefully, particularly
sealant properly. Dispose of the
insert coupling A and tube B in on bends. Do not exceed 80 km/h.
components in compliance with
position. Do not accelerate or brake
national and local regulations.
suddenly.
122) If the pressure has fallen below
1.8 bar, do not drive any further:
the Fix&Go Automatic kit cannot
guarantee proper hold because
the tyre is too damaged. Contact
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

172
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 173

123) Always indicate that the tyre 126) The bottle contains ethylene CHANGING A BULB
was repaired using the quick glycol and latex: it may cause
tyre repair kit. Give the booklet to an allergic reaction. It is harmful if 28)
the technicians who will be swallowed. It is irritant for the 127) 128) 129)
handling the tyre that was treated eyes. It may cause sensitisation if
using the kit. inhaled or on contact. Avoid GENERAL
124) Repair is not possible if the contact with eyes, skin and INSTRUCTIONS
wheel rim is damaged (groove clothes. In the event of contact, Before changing a bulb check the
is deformed, causing air to rinse immediately with plenty contacts for oxidation;
escape). Do not remove foreign of water. If ingested, do not
induce vomiting. Rinse out your replace blown bulbs with others of
bodies (screws or nails) from the
mouth, drink large quantities the same type and power;
tyre.
125) Do not operate the compressor
of water and seek immediate after replacing a headlight bulb,
medical attention. Keep out of the always check its alignment;
for longer than 20 minutes
reach of children. The product
consecutively. Risk of
must not be used by asthmatics. when a light is not working, check
overheating. The kit is not suitable that the corresponding fuse is intact
Do not inhale the vapours during
for definitive repairs, so the before changing the bulb. For the
insertion and suction. Call a
repaired tyres may only be used location of fuses, refer to the
doctor immediately if allergic
temporarily. paragraph If a fuse blows in this
reactions are noted. Store the
bottle in its proper compartment, chapter.
away from sources of heat. The
sealant fluid has an expiry date.
Replace the bottle containing
out-of-date sealant fluid.

173
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 174

IMPORTANT When the weather is cold


IN AN EMERGENCY

or damp or after heavy rain or washing,


the surface of headlights or rear lights,
may steam up and/or form drops of
condensation on the inside. This is WARNING
a natural phenomenon due to the
difference in temperature and humidity 127) Changes or repairs to the
between the inside and the outside electrical system carried out
of the glass which does not indicate a incorrectly and without due
fault and does not compromise the consideration for the technical
normal operation of lighting devices. specifications of the system may
The mist disappears quickly when the lead to malfunctioning and
lights are turned on, starting from generate a fire hazard.
the centre of the diffuser, extending 128) Halogen bulbs contain
progressively towards the edges. pressurised gas. If they break,
glass fragments could fly
everywhere.
129) Due to the high supply voltage,
gas discharge bulbs (Bi-Xenon)
should only be replaced by
IMPORTANT specialised personnel: danger of
death! Contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership.
28) Halogen bulbs must be handled
by holding the metallic part only.
Touching the transparent part
of the bulb with your fingers may
reduce the intensity of the
emitted light and even reduce the
lifespan of the bulb. In the case
of accidental contact, rub the
lamp with a cloth and spirit and
leave to dry.

174
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 175

TYPES OF BULBS

The car has the following light bulbs:

Glass bulbs: (type A) they are press-fitted. Pull to extract.

Bayonet-type bulbs: (type B) to remove from its holder, press


the bulb and turn it anti-clockwise, then extract it.

Tubular bulbs: (type C) release them from their contacts to


remove.

Halogen bulbs: (type D) to remove the bulb, release the clip


holding the bulb in place.

Halogen bulbs: (type E) to remove the bulb, release the clip


holding the bulb in place.

175
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 176
IN AN EMERGENCY

Bulbs Type Power Re. Figure


Front side lights/Daytime running lights (DRL) LED
Rear side lights LED
Dipped headlights H7 55W D
Main beam headlamps H1 55W E
Main/Dipped beams (versions with Bi-Xenon
F D1S -
headlights) (for versions/markets, where provided)
Front direction indicators PY24W 24W B
Rear direction indicators R10W 10W B
Side direction indicators LED
Brake light LED
3rd brake light LED
Number plate light W5W 5W A
Fog lights H3 55W E
Rear fog lights H21W 21W B
Reversing lights P21W 21W B
Front roof light C10W 10W C
Luggage compartment roof light W5W 5W A
Glove compartment light C5W 5W C

176
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 177

REPLACING MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS DIPPED BEAM


EXTERIOR BULBS HEADLIGHTS
To change the bulb, proceed as
follows: To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
FRONT LIGHT CLUSTERS
remove cover A fig. 158; remove cover B fig. 158;
These contain the bulbs for the side
remove the connector A fig. 159 and remove the connector A fig. 160,
lights/daytime running lights (DRL),
then open the tabs B pulling press the tab B forward and then
dipped beams, main beams and
outwards; release by pushing it towards inside
direction indicators. The bulbs are
the car;
arranged as follows fig. 158:

159 A0K0632

158 A0K0631 160 A0K0633

remove the bulb C and replace it;


A Side lights/daytime running lights and remove the bulb C and replace it;
refit the new lamp, making sure that it
main beam headlights refit the new lamp, making sure that it
is locked correctly, secure the tabs B
B Dipped beam headlights again and reconnect the connector is locked correctly, secure the tab B
C Direction indicators A; again and reconnect the connector
A;
then refit the cover A fig. 158.
SIDE LIGHTS/DAYTIME then refit the cover B fig. 158.
RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL)
These are LEDs. For the replacement,
contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.

177
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 178

DIRECTION INDICATORS REAR LIGHT CLUSTERS SIDE LIGHTS/BRAKE


IN AN EMERGENCY

LIGHTS
Front These contain the side lights, brake
lights, direction indicators (bulbs in fixed These are LEDs. For the replacement,
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
light cluster), reverse light and rear fog contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
turn the cover C fig. 158 light (bulb in light cluster on boot hatch).
anticlockwise by of a turn; DIRECTION INDICATORS
Removing the fixed light With the light cluster removed, to
cluster replace the bulb undo the two screws A
Proceed as follows: fig. 163, remove the bulb holder and
replace bulb B.
open the boot and loosen the rear
light cluster fastening screw A fig.
162;

161 A0K0634

replace the bulb + bulb holder


assembly A fig. 161.
163 A0K0636
Side
These are LEDs. For the replacement, REAR FOG LIGHTS/
162 A0K0635
REVERSING LIGHTS
contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
extract the light cluster by removing it To replace the bulbs proceed as
FOG LIGHTS follows:
(for versions/markets, where provided) with both hands in the direction
indicated by the arrows; open the boot and remove the cover
For replacing these bulbs, contact A fig. 164 using a screwdriver in the
an Alfa Romeo Dealership. disconnect the electrical connector
and replace the bulb concerned. point indicated by an arrow;

178
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 179

NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS


To replace the bulbs proceed as
follows:
remove the number plate light units A
fig. 166;

164 A0K0637

remove the connector A fig. 165 and


extract the bulb holder assembly by
operating on the retaining tab B
and then by loosening the screw C;
remove the bulb by pushing it slightly 166 A0K0639

and turning it anticlockwise (D =


reverse light bulb; E = rear fog light turn the bulb holder B fig. 167
bulb); anticlockwise, extract the bulb C and
165
refit the bulb holder assembly A0K0638 replace it.
positioning it correctly, fasten screw
C and then fix it by means of the 3rd BRAKE LIGHTS
retaining tab B. Reconnect connector These are LED lights and are located
A then refit cover A fig. 164. on the spoiler integrated with the
tailgate. For the replacement, contact
IMPORTANT Protect the tip of the an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
screwdriver with a cloth to prevent
scratching when removing the cover A.

167 A0K0640

179
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 180

INTERIOR BULB close protective flap B again and fix


IN AN EMERGENCY

REPLACEMENT roof light A fig. 170 in its housing,


making sure that it is locked.
FRONT ROOF LIGHT
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
remove roof light A fig. 168 working
at the points indicated by the arrows;

169 A0K0807

REAR ROOF LIGHT


To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
171 A0K0644

remove roof light A fig. 170 working


at the points indicated by the arrows; LUGGAGE
COMPARTMENT
COURTESY LIGHT
168 A0K0806
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
open the luggage compartment and
undo the bulb housings B fig. 169
extract courtesy light A fig. 172
and remove them by extracting
working in the point shown by the
outwards: then replace bulbs C;
arrow;
correctly fit the new bulbs in the
open protection B fig. 173 and
relevant housings B;
replace the bulb;
fit roof light A fig. 168 in its housing
170 A0K0643 refit protection B on the lens;
making sure it is locked.
refit courtesy light A fig. 172 by
open protective flap B fig. 171 and inserting it in its correct position firstly
replace bulb C, releasing it from the on one side and then pressing on
side contacts. Make sure that the the other until it clicks into place.
new bulb is correctly secured
between the contacts;

180
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 181

REPLACING FUSES
GENERAL INFORMATION
Fuses protect the electrical system:
they intervene (blow) in the event of a
failure or improper intervention on
the system.
When a device does not work, check
the condition of its protection fuse: the
172 A0K0645 174 A0K0647
filament A fig. 175 must be intact. 29)
30)
refit courtesy light A by inserting it in
its correct position firstly on one side
and then pressing on the other until
it clicks into place.

COURTESY LIGHT
(for versions/markets, where provided)
For bulb replacement, contact an
Alfa Romeo Dealership.
173 A0K0646

175 A0K0523
GLOVE COMPARTMENT
COURTESY LIGHT
If it is not, replace the blown fuse with
To change the bulb, proceed as follows: another having the same amperage
open the glove compartment and (same colour). 130) 131) 132) 133) 134)

extract courtesy light A fig. 174; B = undamaged fuse.


open protection B and replace the C = fuse with damaged filament.
bulb;
refit protection B on the lens;

181
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 182

Use the pliers A fig. 176 under the


IN AN EMERGENCY

VERSIONS WITH "ALFA


engine compartment junction unit lid to TCT" AUTOMATIC
remove the fuses (see Engine TRANSMISSION
(for versions/markets, where provided)
compartment junction unit for how to
remove the lid). The Alfa TCT transmission components
are protected by specific fuses. Contact
an Alfa Romeo Dealership if a fuse
needs replacing.

176 A0K0524

182
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 183

FUSE LOCATION
Fuses are grouped together in three
fuse boxes located in the engine
compartment, dashboard and luggage
F85
compartment. F10
F86

F19
Engine compartment fuse box F09
F87
This is located next to the battery fig. F88 F21
F20
178: to access the fuses, undo screws
A fig. 177 and remove cover B. 178 A0K0231

177 A0K0525

The number identifying the electrical


component corresponding to each fuse
is on the back of the cover.
After replacing the fuse, make sure you
close cover B on the junction unit.

183
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 184

Dashboard fuse box


IN AN EMERGENCY

To access the fuses fig. 180 insert a


hand in the housing A fig. 179 and
lower the flap B.

179 A0K0527

180 A0K0244

184
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 185

Luggage compartment fuse box


The fuse box (fig. 181) is located on the
left side of the luggage compartment
underneath the side cover.

181 A0K0529

For access, contact an Alfa Romeo


Dealership.

185
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 186

ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSE BOX


IN AN EMERGENCY

fig. 178

DEVICE PROTECTED FUSE AMPS


Headlamp washer pump power supply F09 30
Horn F10 15
AC compressor F19 7,5
Heated rear window F20 30
Fuel pump F21 15
Cigar lighter/power socket F85 20
12 V boot power socket F86 20
IBS Battery charge status sensor for Start&Stop system F87 5
External mirror defrosters F88 7,5

186
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 187

INSTRUMENT PANEL FUSE BOX


fig. 180

DEVICE PROTECTED FUSE AMPS


Right main beam headlight F91 7,5
Left main beam headlight F90 7,5
Right dipped beam headlight (versions with halogen headlights) F12 7,5
Left dipped beam headlight (versions with halogen headlights) F13 7,5
Right dipped beam headlight (versions with Bi-Xenon headlights) F12 15
Left dipped beam headlight (versions with Bi-Xenon headlights) F13 15
Right fog light F93 7,5
Left fog light F92 7,5
Luggage compartment courtesy light/Sun visor courtesy light/Glove
F32 10
compartment courtesy light/Front and rear roof lights
Various devices F31 5
Rear electric window (left side) F33 20
Rear electric window (right side) F34 20
+30 F36 10
Various devices F37 7,5
Central locking F38 20
Body Computer supply F42 5
Two-way windscreen washer pump F43 20
Front electric window (driver side) F47 20

187
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 188
IN AN EMERGENCY

DEVICE PROTECTED FUSE AMPS


Front electric window (passenger side) F48 20
Various devices F49 5
Various devices F50 7.5
Various devices F51 5
+30 F53 7,5

188
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 189

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT JUNCTION UNIT


fig. 181

DEVICE PROTECTED FUSE AMPS


Left front seat movement F1 15
Right front seat movement F2 15
Electric sun roof F3 15
Front seat heating F5 15
BOSE amplifier + Subwoofer F6 20

IMPORTANT

29) Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or other material.
30) If it is necessary to wash the engine compartment, take care not to directly hit the junction unit and the window
wiper motors with the water jet.

189
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 190
IN AN EMERGENCY

WARNING

130) If the fuse blows again contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.


131) Never replace a fuse with another with a higher amp rating; DANGER OF FIRE.
132) If a general protection fuse (MAXI-FUSE, MEGA-FUSE, MIDI-FUSE) blows, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
133) Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition key has been removed and that all the other services are
switched off and/or deactivated.
134) Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership if a safety system (airbags, brakes), power unit system (engine, gearbox) or
steering system general protection fuse blows.

190
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 191

BATTERY VERSIONS WITH connect the positive cable (+) of the


RECHARGING Start&Stop SYSTEM battery charger to the positive battery
(for versions/markets, where provided) terminal E and the negative cable ()
IMPORTANT The battery recharging To recharge, proceed as follows: to sensor terminal D as shown;
procedure is given as information only.
disconnect the connector A fig. 182 turn on the battery charger. At the
To carry out this operation contact
(pressing the button B) from the end of the charging process, switch
an Alfa Romeo Dealership.
sensor C monitoring the battery the battery charger off;
IMPORTANT After turning the ignition conditions, on the negative pole () D after having disconnected the
key to STOP and having closed the of the battery; charging device, reconnect
driver's side door, wait at least one connector A to the sensor C as
minute before disconnecting and then shown.
reconnecting the battery electrical
supply.

Charging should be slow at a low


ampere rating for approximately 24
hours. Charging for a longer time may
damage the battery.
VERSIONS WITHOUT
Start&Stop SYSTEM
(for versions/markets, where provided)
To recharge, proceed as follows:
disconnect the negative battery
terminal;
connect the charger cables to the
battery terminals, observing the
polarity;
turn on the charger;
when it is recharged, turn the charger
off before disconnecting it from the
battery; 182 A0K0530
reconnect the negative battery
terminal. 191
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 192

RAISING THE CAR TOWING THE CAR


IN AN EMERGENCY

If the car needs to be jacked up, go to The tow ring provided with the car is
an Alfa Romeo Dealership which is housed in the tool box in the boot.
equipped with shop jacks and jack
arms. ATTACHING THE TOW
HOOK
IMPORTANT Be careful when Release plug A by pressing the lower
positioning the arm of the lift for part, take tow hook B from its housing
versions with side skirts. in the tool support and tighten it
184 A0K0704
securely on the front threaded pin (fig.
183) or on the rear threaded pin (fig.
184).
135) 136) 137)

WARNING

135) Before towing, turn the ignition


key to MAR-ON and then to STOP
without removing it. The steering
column will automatically lock
when the key is removed and the
wheels cannot be steered. Also
check that the gearbox is in
183 A0K0623 neutral (on versions equipped with
Alfa TCT automatic transmission,
check that the gear lever is in N
position)

192
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 193

136) Remember that the brake servo 137) The front and rear tow hooks
and the electromechanical power should be used only for
steering will not work while emergencies on the road. You are
towing the car. You will therefore allowed to tow the vehicle for
need to apply more force on the short distances using an
brake pedal and steering wheel. appropriate device in accordance
Do not use wires for towing. Do with the highway code (a rigid
not jerk. During towing, make sure bar), to move the vehicle on the
that the trailer hitch does not road in readiness for towing or
damage any components it transport via a tow truck. Tow
is touching. When towing the car, hooks MUST NOT be used to tow
you must comply with all specific vehicles off the road or where
traffic regulations and adopt an there are obstacles and/or for
appropriate driving behaviour. Do towing operations using cables or
not start the engine while towing other non-rigid devices.
the car. Before tightening the Respecting the above conditions,
ring, clean the threaded housing towing must take place with two
thoroughly. Make sure that the vehicles (one towing, the other
ring is fully fastened in the towed) aligned as much as
housing before towing the car. possible along the same centre
line.

193
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 194

This page is intentionally left blank

194
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 195

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Correct maintenance permits the SCHEDULED SERVICING ...............196


performance of the car to be SCHEDULED SERVICING PLAN .....197
maintained over time, as well as limited
running costs and safeguarding the PERIODIC CHECKS........................204
efficiency of the safety systems. HEAVY-DUTY USE OF THE CAR.....204
This chapter explains how. CHECKING LEVELS........................205
AIR CLEANER/POLLEN
FILTER/DIESEL FILTER....................210
BATTERY ........................................211
WHEELS AND TYRES.....................212
WINDSCREEN/REAR WINDOW
WIPERS ..........................................213
BODYWORK...................................216
INTERIORS .....................................218

195
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 196

SCHEDULED WARNING
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SERVICING The Scheduled Services intervals are


set out by the Manufacturer. Failure
Correct servicing is essential in
to comply with the schedule may
guaranteeing a long life for the car
invalidate the warranty.
under the best conditions.
It is advisable to inform the Alfa Romeo
For this reason, Alfa Romeo has
Dealership of any small operating
planned a series of checks and services
irregularities without waiting for the next
at fixed distance intervals and, for
service.
versions/markets, where provided, at
fixed time intervals, as described in the For versions equipped with specific
Scheduled Servicing Plan. supply (e.g. LPG) and/or trim level, in
addition to what is described in the
Regardless of the above, it is always
following Scheduled Servicing Plan,
necessary to carefully follow the
refer to the relevant additional items in
instructions in the Scheduled Servicing
the dedicated supplements.
Plan (e.g. periodically check level of
liquids, tyre pressure, etc.).
Scheduled Servicing is offered by all
Alfa Romeo Dealerships according to
fixed time or kilometres/miles intervals.
If, during each operation, in addition
to the ones scheduled, the need arises
for further replacements or repairs,
these may be carried out only with your
explicit agreement. If your car is used
frequently for towing, the interval
between one service operation and the
next should be reduced.

196
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 197

SCHEDULED SERVICING PLAN


PETROL VERSIONS
The checks listed in the Scheduled Servicing Plan, after reaching 120,000 km/8 years, must be cyclically repeated starting from
the first interval, thus following the same intervals as before.

Thousands of miles 9 18 27 36 45 54 63 72 81 90

Thousands of kilometres 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150


Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Check tyre condition/wear and adjust pressure, if
necessary; check Fix&Go Automatic kit recharge expiry
date (for versions/markets, where provided)
Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction
indicators, hazard warning lights, luggage compartment,

passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument
panel warning lights, etc.)
Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (engine
coolant, hydraulic clutch/brakes, windscreen washer,
battery, etc.)
Check exhaust emissions/smokiness
Use the diagnosis socket to check supply/engine
management system operation, emissions and, for
versions/markets, where provided, engine oil degradation
Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork,
underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel

system, brakes), rubber elements (boots, sleeves, bushes,
etc.)
Check windscreen/rear window wiper blade position/wear

197
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 198
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Thousands of miles 9 18 27 36 45 54 63 72 81 90

Thousands of kilometres 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Check operation of windscreen wiper/washer system and

adjust jets, if necessary
Check cleanliness of bonnet and luggage compartment

locks, as well as cleanliness and lubrication of linkages
Check handbrake lever travel and adjust, if necessary
Visually inspect condition and wear of front disc brake

pads and operation of pad wear indicator
Visually inspect condition and wear of rear disc brake pads
and operation of pad wear indicator (for versions/markets,
where provided)
Visually inspect condition and tensioning of accessory

drive belt(s) (for versions without automatic tensioner only)
Visually inspect condition of toothed timing drive belt
Check and, if necessary, top up the Alfa TCT control oil

level (for versions/markets, where provided) (1)
Change engine oil and replace oil filter (1.4 Turbo Petrol

and 1.4 Turbo MultiAir versions) (2)

(1) Check to be carried out every year for cars on the road in countries with particularly severe climates (cold countries).
(2) If the vehicle is used mainly around town or the annual km is less than 10,000 km, the engine oil and engine oil filter must be changed every year.

198
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 199

Thousands of miles 9 18 27 36 45 54 63 72 81 90

Thousands of kilometres 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Change engine oil and replace oil filter (1750 Turbo Petrol
versions) (3)
Replace spark plugs (1.4 Turbo Petrol and 1.4 Turbo

MultiAir versions) (4)
Replace spark plugs (1750 Turbo Petrol versions)
Replace accessory drive belt(s) (5)
Replace toothed timing drive belt (5)

(3) The actual interval for changing engine oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signalled by the warning light or
message in the instrument panel. Anyway, it must never exceed 1 year.
(4) For 1.4 Turbo Petrol and 1.4 Turbo MultiAir versions, to guarantee correct operation and prevent serious damage to the engine, it is essential to proceed as
follows: only use spark plugs specifically certified for these engines; all spark plugs should be of the same type and brand (see the Engine paragraph in the
Technical specifications section); strictly comply with the replacement intervals in the Scheduled Servicing Plan. It is advisable to contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership for spark plug replacement.
(5) Areas that are not dusty: advised maximum mileage 120,000 km. Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 6 years.
Dusty areas and/or demanding use of the car (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage 60,000 km. Regardless of the mileage,
the belt must be replaced every 4 years.

199
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 200
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Thousands of miles 9 18 27 36 45 54 63 72 81 90

Thousands of kilometres 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Replace air cleaner cartridge (6)

Replace brake fluid

Replace passenger compartment filter (6) O O O O O

(6) If the car is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 15,000 km.
(O) Recommended operations
() Mandatory operations

200
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 201

DIESEL VERSIONS
The checks listed in the Scheduled Servicing Plan, after reaching 120,000 km/6 years, must be cyclically repeated starting from
the first interval, thus following the same intervals as before.

Thousands of miles 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120

Thousands of kilometres 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Check tyre condition/wear and adjust pressure, if
necessary; check Fix&Go Automatic kit recharge expiry
date (for versions/markets, where provided)
Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction
indicators, hazard warning lights, luggage compartment,

passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument
panel warning lights, etc.)
Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (engine
coolant, hydraulic clutch/brakes, windscreen washer,
battery, etc.)
Check exhaust emissions/smokiness
Use the diagnosis socket to check supply/engine
management system operation, emissions and, for
versions/markets, where provided, engine oil degradation
Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork,
underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel

system, brakes), rubber elements (boots, sleeves, bushes,
etc.)
Check windscreen/rear window wiper blade position/wear
Check operation of windscreen wiper/washer system and

adjust jets, if necessary

201
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 202
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Thousands of miles 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120

Thousands of kilometres 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Check cleanliness of bonnet and luggage compartment

locks, as well as cleanliness and lubrication of linkages
Check handbrake lever travel and adjust, if necessary
Visually inspect condition and wear of front disc brake

pads and operation of pad wear indicator
Visually inspect condition and wear of rear disc brake pads
and operation of pad wear indicator (for versions/markets,
where provided)
Visually inspect condition and tensioning of accessory

drive belt(s) (for versions without automatic tensioner only)
Check and, if necessary, top up the Alfa TCT control oil

level (for versions/markets, where provided) (1)
Change engine oil and replace oil filter (2) (3)

(1) Check to be carried out every year for cars on the road in countries with particularly severe climates (cold countries).
(2) The actual interval for changing engine oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signalled by the warning light or
message in the instrument panel. Anyway, it must never exceed 2 years.
(3) If the car is mainly used in towns and cities, change the engine oil and filter every year.

202
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 203

Thousands of miles 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120

Thousands of kilometres 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Replace accessory drive belt(s) (4)
Replace toothed timing drive belt (4)
Replace fuel filter cartridge (5)
Replace air cleaner cartridge (6)

Replace brake fluid

Replace passenger compartment filter (6) O O O O O

(4) Areas that are not dusty: advised maximum mileage 120,000 km. Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 6 years.
Dusty areas and/or demanding use of the car (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage 60,000 km. Regardless of the mileage,
the belt must be replaced every 4 years.
(5) If the car runs on fuel with quality below the relevant European specification, this filter must be replaced every 20,000 km
(6) If the car is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 20,000 km.
(O) Recommended operations
() Mandatory operations

203
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 204

PERIODIC CHECKS HEAVY-DUTY USE OF check and, if necessary, change


SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

THE CAR engine oil and replace oil filter;


Every 1,000 km or before long
check and, if necessary, replace
journeys, check and, if necessary, top If the car is used mainly under one of
pollen filter;
up the following: the following conditions:
check and, if necessary, replace air
engine coolant, brake fluid and towing a trailer or caravan;
cleaner.
windscreen washer fluid level; dusty roads;
tyre inflation pressure and condition; short, repeated journeys (less than
operation of lighting system 7-8 km) at sub-zero outside
(headlamps, direction indicators, temperatures;
hazard warning lights, etc.); engine often idling or driving long
operation of window washer/wiper distances at low speeds or long
system and positioning/wear of periods of idleness;
windscreen/rear window wiper the following checks must be carried
blades out more often than indicated in the
Check and top up, if required, the Scheduled Servicing Plan:
engine oil level every 3,000 km. check front disc brake pad
conditions and wear;
check cleanliness of bonnet and boot
locks, cleanliness and lubrication of
linkage;
visually inspect conditions of: engine,
gearbox, transmission, pipes and
hoses (exhaust - fuel system -
brakes) and rubber elements (boots -
sleeves - bushes - etc.);
check battery charge and battery
fluid level (electrolyte);
visually inspect condition of the
accessory drive belts;

204
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 205

CHECKING LEVELS
31)

138) 139)
.

185 - 1.4 Turbo Petrol versions A0K0655

205
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 206
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

186 - 1.4 Turbo MultiAir versions A0K0656

206
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 207

187 - 1750 Turbo Petrol versions A0K0657

207
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 208
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

188 - Diesel versions A0K0658

ENGINE OIL Take out the engine oil dipstick A, clean Engine oil consumption
Check that the oil level is between the it with a lint-free cloth and reinsert it. 33) 3)
MIN and MAX references on the Extract it again and check that the level
The maximum engine oil consumption
dipstick A. is between the MIN and MAX marks
is usually 400 grams every 1,000 km.
on the dipstick.
If the oil level is near or under the MIN When the car is new, the engine needs
reference, add oil through the filler B to be run in; therefore the engine oil
until it reaches the MAX reference. consumption can only be considered
140) 32) stabilised after the first 5,000 - 6,000
km.

208
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 209

ENGINE COOLANT ALFA TCT ACTIVATION 34) PARAFLU UP anti-freeze fluid is


SYSTEM OIL used in the engine cooling
If the level is too low, unscrew reservoir (for versions/markets, where provided) system; use the same fluid type as
cap C and add the fluid described in
The transmission control oil level should that already in the cooling system
the "Technical Specifications" section.
only be checked at an Alfa Romeo when topping up. PARAFLU UP
34) 141)
Dealership. 4) may not be mixed with other types
of anti-freeze fluids. In the event
WINDSCREEN/REAR of topping up with an unsuitable
WINDOW WASHER FLUID
product, under no circumstances
If the level is too low, lift reservoir cap D start the engine and contact an
and add the fluid described in the Alfa Romeo Dealership.
chapter "Technical Specifications". 35) Avoid allowing brake fluid, which
142) 143) IMPORTANT
is extremely corrosive, to come
into contact with painted areas.
IMPORTANT The headlight washer 31) Be careful not to confuse the Should it happen, wash
system will not operate when the fluid various types of fluids while immediately with water.
level is low, even though the topping up: they are not
windscreen/rear window washer compatible with each other!
continues to operate. For versions/ Topping up with an unsuitable
markets, where provided, there is fluid could severely damage your
a reference notch E on the dipstick (see car.
previous pages): ONLY the 32) The oil level should never exceed
windscreen/rear window wiper WARNING
the MAX mark.
operates with the level below this
33) Do not add oil with specifications
reference. 138) Never smoke when performing
other than those of the oil already
in the engine. operations in the engine
BRAKE FLUID compartment. Flammable gases
Check that the fluid is at the max. level. and fumes may be present and
risk igniting.
If the fluid level in the reservoir is too
139) Be very careful when working in
low, undo reservoir cap E and add the
the engine compartment when
fluid described in the chapter "Technical the engine is hot: you may get
Specifications". burned.
35) 144) 145)

209
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 210

140) If the engine oil is being topped 144) Brake fluid is poisonous and AIR CLEANER/
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

up, wait for the engine to cool highly corrosive. In the event of POLLEN
down before loosening the filler accidental contact, immediately FILTER/DIESEL
plug, particularly for cars with wash the affected parts with FILTER
aluminium plug (for versions/ water and mild soap. Then rinse
markets, where provided). thoroughly. Call a doctor For filter replacement, contact an Alfa
WARNING: risk of burns! immediately if swallowed. Romeo Dealership.
141) The cooling system is 145) The symbol on the container
pressurised. If necessary, only indicates a synthetic brake fluid,
replace the plug with another which is different from a mineral
original or the operation of the fluid. Using a mineral-type fluid
system may be adversely affected. will damage the special rubber
Do not remove the reservoir plug seals of the braking system
when the engine is hot: you risk beyond repair.
burns.
142) Do not travel with the
windscreen washer reservoir
empty: the windscreen washer is
essential for improving visibility.
Repeated operation of the system IMPORTANT
without fluid could damage or
cause rapid deterioration of some
3) Used engine oil and oil filters
system components.
contain substances which are
143) Certain commercial additives harmful to the environment. You
for windscreen washer fluids are are advised to contact an Alfa
inflammable. The engine Romeo Dealership to have the oil
compartment contains hot and filters changed.
components which may set it on
4) Used transmission fluid contains
fire.
substances that are harmful to
the environment. You are advised
to contact an Alfa Romeo
Dealership for oil changes.

210
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 211

BATTERY switch off all roof lights inside the car: If, after purchasing the car, you wish to
the car is however equipped with a install electrical accessories which
Battery F (see previous pages) does not system which switches all internal require permanent electrical supply (e.g.
require the electrolyte to be topped up lights off automatically; alarm, etc.) or accessories which
with distilled water. A periodic check influence the electrical supply
do not keep accessories (e.g. sound
carried out at an Alfa Romeo Dealership requirements, contact an Alfa Romeo
system, hazard lights, etc.) switched
is, however, necessary to check Dealership, whose qualified staff will
on for a long time when the engine
efficiency. evaluate the overall electrical
is not running;
consumption.
REPLACING THE before performing any operation on
BATTERY the electrical system, disconnect
146) 147) 148) 149) the negative battery cable.
36)
IMPORTANT After the battery is
5) disconnected, the steering must be
If necessary, replace the battery with initialised. The warning light WARNING
another original battery with the same switches on to indicate this. To carry
specifications. Follow the battery out this procedure, simply turn the 146) Battery liquid is poisonous and
manufacturer's instructions for steering wheel all the way from one end corrosive. Avoid contact with the
maintenance. to the other or drive in a straight line skin and eyes. Keep naked flames
for about a hundred metres. and sources of sparks away from
USEFUL ADVICE FOR the battery: risk of explosion and
EXTENDING THE LIFE OF IMPORTANT If the charge level remains fire.
YOUR BATTERY under 50% for a long time, the battery 147) Using the battery with
To avoid draining your battery and is damaged by sulphation, reducing insufficient fluid irreparably
make it last longer, observe the its capacity and efficiency at start-up. damages the battery and may
following instructions: The battery will also be more at risk cause an explosion.
when you park the car, ensure that of freezing (this can happen as early as 148) If the car must remain unused
the doors, tailgate and bonnet are 10C). Refer to the paragraph "Car for a long time at a very low
closed properly, to prevent any lights inactivity" in "Starting and driving" temperature, remove the battery
from remaining on inside the chapter if the car is left parked for a and take it to a warm place, to
passenger's compartment; long time. avoid freezing.

211
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 212

149) When performing any WHEELS AND TYRES The tyres must be replaced when the
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

operation on the battery or near it, tread is less than 1.6 mm thick. In
always protect your eyes with Before embarking on a long trip, and any case, follow the laws in force in the
special goggles. every two weeks, check the tyre country you are in.
inflation pressure. Check the tyres when
cold. IMPORTANT
150) 151) 152) 153)
INFORMATION
It is normal for the pressure to increase Take the following precautions to
IMPORTANT when the car is used; for the correct prevent damage to the tyres:
tyre inflation pressure, see Wheels in avoid violent impact against the kerb,
the Technical specifications chapter. potholes or obstacles as well as
36) Incorrect assembly of electrical
and electronic accessories may Incorrect pressure causes abnormal driving for extended periods on
cause severe damage to your car. tyre wear fig. 189: uneven road surfaces;
Go to an Alfa Romeo Dealership A normal pressure: tread evenly worn; periodically check that the tyres have
if you want to install accessories no cuts in the side walls, abnormal
(e.g. anti-theft, radio phone, etc.): B low pressure: tread particularly worn
swelling or irregular tread wear;
they will suggest the most at the edges;
suitable devices and advise you avoid travelling with the car
C high pressure: tread particularly
whether a higher capacity battery overloaded. If a tyre is punctured,
worn in the centre.
needs to be installed. stop immediately and change it;
tyres age even if they are not used a
great deal. Cracks in the tread and
on the side walls are a sign of ageing.
Have the tyres checked by
specialised personnel if they have
IMPORTANT been fitted for longer than 6 years;
in case of replacement, always fit
5) Batteries contain substances new tyres, avoiding those of dubious
which are very dangerous for the origin;
environment. For battery 189 A0K0531

replacement, contact an Alfa if a tyre is changed, also change the


Romeo Dealership. inflation valve.

212
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 213

WINDSCREEN/REAR
WINDOW WIPERS
BLADES
WARNING
It is advisable to replace the blades
about once a year.
150) The road holding qualities of
154)
the car also depend on the correct
inflation pressure of the tyres. A few simple precautions can reduce
151) If tyre pressure is too low, it
the possibility of damage to the blade: 190 A0K0532

may overheat and be severely if the temperature falls below zero,


damaged as a result. make sure that ice has not frozen Raising the windscreen
wipers
152) Do not switch tyres from the the rubber to the glass. Use an
left to the right side and vice antifreeze product to release it if If it is necessary to lift the blade from
versa, in order to prevent required; the windscreen (e.g. in the event of
inversion of the rotation direction. snow or if the blade needs
remove any snow from the glass;
153) Do not repaint alloy wheel rims replacement) proceed as follows:
do not operate the windscreen/rear
at temperatures higher than turn the ignition key to the MAR-ON
window wipers on dry glass.
150C. The mechanical position;
characteristics of the wheels
Replacing the operate the lever to the right of the
might be compromised. windscreen wiper steering wheel to activate a
blades windscreen wiper stroke (see
Proceed as follows: paragraph "Window washing" in
raise the wiper arm, press tab A fig. chapter "Getting to know your car");
190 of the attachment spring and turn the ignition key to the STOP
remove the blade from the arm; position when the driver's side wiper
fit the new blade by inserting the tab blade reaches the windscreen side
into the special slot in the arm. Make pillar and lift the windscreen wiper to
sure that it is properly locked into the rest position;
place. bring the wiper blades back into
lower the wiper arm on the contact with the windscreen before
windscreen. activating the windscreen wiper.

213
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 214

Each time the function is activated


SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

37)
correctly, the blades move to signal the
"Service position" correct reception of the command.
Function activation This command can be repeated up to a
The "Service position" function allows maximum of three times. After that the
the driver to replace the windscreen function is disabled.
wiper blades more easily, protecting If after using this function the key is
them from snow. brought back to MAR-ON and the
To activate this function disable the blades are not in the stop position, 192 A0K0533

windscreen wiper (ring nut A fig. 191 in these will be brought in the 1st speed
position O) before turning the ignition stop position only after a command correctly position the new arm, fully
key to STOP. given through that lever (moving the tighten the nut B then lower the
lever in unstable position) or when cover A.
This function can only be activated 5 km/h are exceeded.
within 2 minutes from when the ignition
key is turned to STOP. Function deactivation NOZZLES
The function is deactivated if:
Windscreen washer
two minutes have passed since when
The windscreen washer nozzles are
the ignition key has been taken to
fixed fig. 193.
STOP;
the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON
and the blades are in the stop
position;
is activated 3 times.

191 A0K0557
Replacing the rear
window wiper blade
To activate this function, move the lever
Proceed as follows:
upwards (unstable position) for at
least half a second. raise cover A fig. 192, undo nut B 193 A0K0139

and remove arm C;

214
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 215

If there is no jet of fluid, firstly check


that there is some fluid in the reservoir
(see paragraph "Checking fluid levels"
in this chapter).
Then check that the nozzle holes are IMPORTANT
not clogged, if necessary use a needle.
37) Do not operate the windscreen
Rear window washer wiper with the blades lifted from
the windscreen.
The nozzle holder is located on the rear
195 A0K0534
window fig. 194.
Check the correct condition and
cleanliness of nozzles at regular
intervals.

WARNING
194 A0K0102

154) Driving with worn windscreen/


The rear window washer jets are fixed. rear window wiper blades is a
serious hazard, because visibility
HEADLIGHT WASHERS is reduced in bad weather.
(for versions/markets, where provided)
These are located within the front
bumper fig. 195.
They are activated when the dipped
beam and/or main beam headlights are
on and the windscreen washer is
activated.

215
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 216

BODYWORK BODY AND UNDERBODY remove the aerial from the roof when
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

WARRANTY using a carwash;


PROTECTION AGAINST Your car is covered by warranty against if high pressure jets or cleaners are
ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS perforation due to rust of any original used to wash the car, keep a
The car is equipped with the best element of the structure or bodywork. distance of at least 40 cm from the
available technological solutions to For the general terms of this warranty, bodywork to avoid damage or
effectively protect the bodywork against refer to the Warranty Booklet. alteration. Bear in mind that a build
corrosion. up of water could cause damage
PRESERVING THE to the car in the long term;
These include: BODYWORK
painting products and systems which wash the bodywork using a low
give the car resistance to corrosion Paintwork 6) 38) pressure jet of water;
and abrasion Touch up abrasions and scratches wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy
use of galvanised (or pretreated) steel immediately to prevent the formation of solution over the bodywork,
sheets, with high resistance to rust. frequently rinsing the sponge;
corrosion; Maintenance of paintwork consists of rinse well with water and dry with a
spraying of plastic parts, with a washing the car: the frequency jet of air or a chamois leather.
protective function in the more depends on the conditions and Dry the less visible parts (e.g. door
exposed points: underdoor, inner environment where the car is used. For frames, bonnet, headlight frames, etc.)
wing, edges, etc; example, it is advisable to wash the with special care, as water may
car more often in areas with high levels stagnate more easily in these areas. Do
use of open boxed sections to
of atmospheric pollution or salted not wash the car after it has been left
prevent condensation and pockets of
roads. in the sun or with the bonnet hot:
moisture which could favour the
formation of rust inside; On some versions the car may be this may alter the shine of the
equipped, on request, with an exclusive paintwork.
use of special films to protect against
opaque paint on the roof which, in Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned
abrasion in exposed areas (e.g. rear
order to be maintained intact, requires in the same way as the rest of the car.
wing, doors, etc.).
special care: see the instructions in
the warning. 39)

To correctly wash the car, follow these


instructions:

216
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 217

IMPORTANT Engine compartment


Avoid parking under trees; the resin At the end of every winter, wash the
dropped by trees makes the paintwork engine compartment thoroughly, taking
go opaque and increases the possibility care not to aim the jet of water directly
of corrosion. at the electronic control units or at IMPORTANT

Bird droppings must be washed off the windscreen wiper motors. Have this
operation performed at a specialised 38) In order to preserve the aesthetic
immediately and thoroughly as the acid
workshop. appearance of the paint abrasive
they contain is particularly aggressive.
products and/or polishes should
IMPORTANT The washing should take not be used for cleaning the car.
Windows place with the engine cold and the
Use specific detergents and clean ignition key in the STOP position. After
cloths to prevent scratching or altering the washing operation, make sure
the transparency. that the various protections (e.g. rubber
caps and guards) have not been
IMPORTANT Wipe the rear window removed or damaged.
inside gently with a cloth following the
direction of the filaments to avoid
damaging the heating device.

Front headlights
Use a soft cloth soaked in water and IMPORTANT
detergent for washing cars.

IMPORTANT Never use aromatic 6) Detergents cause water pollution.


substances (e.g. petrol) or ketenes (e.g. Only wash your car in areas
acetone) for cleaning the plastic lenses equipped to collect and treat
of the front headlights. wastewater from this type
of activity.
IMPORTANT When cleaning with a
pressure washer, keep the water jet at
least 20 cm away from the headlights.

217
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 218

39) Avoid washing with rollers INTERIORS PLASTIC AND COATED


SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

and/or brushes in washing PARTS


stations. Wash the car only by 155) 156) 157)
Clean interior plastic parts with a damp
hand using neutral pH detergents; Periodically check the cleanliness of the cloth (if possible made from microfibre),
dry it with a wet chamois leather. interior, beneath the mats, which could and a solution of water and neutral,
Abrasive products and/or polishes cause oxidation of the sheet metal. non-abrasive detergent. To clean oily or
should not be used for cleaning
persistent stains, use specific products
the car. Bird droppings must SEATS AND FABRIC free from solvents and designed to
be washed off immediately and PARTS
thoroughly as the acid they
maintain the original appearance and
Remove dust with a soft brush or a colour of the components.
contain is particularly aggressive.
Avoid (if at all possible) parking
vacuum cleaner. It is advisable to use a
Remove any dust using a microfibre
the car under trees; remove moist brush on velvet upholstery. Rub
cloth, if necessary moistened with
vegetable resins immediately as, the seats with a sponge moistened with
water. The use of paper tissues is not
when dried, it may only be a solution of water and neutral
recommended as these may leave
possible to remove them with detergent.
residues. 40)
abrasive products and/or polishes,
which is highly inadvisable as LEATHER SEATS
(for versions/markets, where provided) LEATHER PARTS
they could alter the typical opacity (for versions/markets, where provided)
of the paint. Do not use pure Remove the dry dirt with a slightly
Use only water and mild soap to clean
windscreen washer fluid for damp buckskin or cloth, without
cleaning the front windscreen and
these parts. Never use alcohol or
exercising too much pressure. Remove
rear window; dilute it min. 50% alcohol-based products. Before using a
any liquid or grease stains using an
with water. Only use pure screen specific product for cleaning interiors,
absorbent dry cloth, without rubbing.
washer fluid when strictly make sure that it does not contain
Then clean with a soft cloth or buckskin
necessary due to outside alcohol and/or alcohol-based
cloth dampened with water and mild
temperature conditions. substances.
soap. If the stain persists, use specific
products and observe the instructions
carefully.

IMPORTANT Never use alcohol. Make


sure that the cleaning products used
contain no alcohol or alcohol
derivatives, even in small quantities.

218
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 219

WARNING IMPORTANT

155) Never use flammable products, 40) Never use alcohol, petrols and
such as petroleum ether or derivatives to clean the dashboard
modified petrol, to clean the and instrument panel lens.
inside of the car. The electrostatic
charges which are generated by
rubbing during the cleaning
operation may cause a fire.
156) Do not keep aerosol cans in the
car: they might explode. Aerosol
cans must not be exposed to a
temperature exceeding 50C.
When the car is exposed to
sunlight, the internal temperature
can greatly exceed this value.
157) There should be no obstacles
on the floor underneath the
pedals; make sure that mats are
always flat and do not interfere
with the pedals.

219
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 220

This page is intentionally left blank

220
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 221

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Everything you may find useful for IDENTIFICATION DATA....................222


understanding how your car is made ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK
and works is contained in this chapter VERSIONS ......................................223
and illustrated with data, tables and
graphics. For the enthusiasts and the ENGINE ..........................................226
technician, but also just for those who FUEL SUPPLY.................................231
want to know every detail of their
car. TRANSMISSION .............................232
BRAKES .........................................233
SUSPENSION .................................234
STEERING SYSTEM .......................235
WHEELS .........................................236
DIMENSIONS..................................240
PERFORMANCE .............................241
WEIGHTS........................................242
REFUELLING ..................................245
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............248
FUEL CONSUMPTION ....................252
CO2 EMISSIONS ............................254
PRESCRIPTIONS FOR HANDLING
THE VEHICLE AT THE END OF ITS
LIFE ................................................255

221
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 222

IDENTIFICATION G Maximum permitted weight on first BODYWORK PAINT


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DATA (front) axle IDENTIFICATION PLATE


H Maximum permitted weight on It is applied under the bonnet and
The identification data of the car are: second (rear) axle shows the following data fig. 198:
V.I.N. plate; I Engine type.
Chassis marking; L Bodywork version code.
Body paintwork identification plate; M Spares number.
Engine marking. N Correct value of smoke coefficient
(for diesel engines)
V.I.N. PLATE
CHASSIS MARKING
This plate is fitted to the engine
compartment front crossmember and This is printed on the passenger
contains the following data fig. 196: compartment floor, near the front right
seat. 198 A0K0025

Slide the flap A fig. 197 forward to A Paint manufacturer.


access.
B Colour name.
C Fiat colour code.
D Respray and touch up code.

ENGINE MARKING
This is stamped on the cylinder block
196 A0K0024 and gives the model and the chassis
serial number.
B Type-approval number.
C Vehicle type identification code 197 A0K0750

D Chassis serial number.


E Maximum authorised weight of The marking includes:
vehicle fully laden vehicle type (ZAR 940000);
F Maximum authorised weight of chassis serial number.
vehicle fully laden plus trailer.

222
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 223

ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS


PETROL VERSIONS

Versions Engine code Bodywork versions


940FXT1A 18
940FXT1A 18B (*)
1.4 Turbo Petrol 120 HP 940B7000
940FXT1A 18C (**)
940FXT1A 18D (*) (**)
940FXU1A 19
940FXU1A 19B (*)
1.4 Turbo Petrol 105 HP (***) 940B8000
940FXU1A 19C (**)
940FXU1A 19D (*) (**)
940FXB1A 01L
940FXB1A 01M (*)
1.4 Turbo MultiAir 170 HP 940A2000
940FXB1A 01N (**)
940FXB1A 01P (*) (**)

(*) Versions with oversized brake calipers (16" tyres excluded)


(**) Versions for markets with reduced towing capacity 500 kg
(***) For versions/markets, where provided

223
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 224
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Versions Engine code Bodywork versions


940FXB11 10G (****)
940FXB11 10H (*****)
1.4 Turbo MultiAir 170 HP TCT 940A2000
940FXB11 10L (******)
940FXB11 10M (*******)
940FXB11 10N
1.4 Turbo MultiAir 170 HP TCT (***) 940A2000
940FXB11 10P (*)
940FXG1A 06E
1.4 Turbo MultiAir 163 HP (***) 955A8000
940FXG1A 06F (*)
940FXG11 13C
1.4 Turbo MultiAir 163 HP TCT (***) 955A8000
940FXG11 13D (*)
1750 Turbo Petrol 235 HP (***) 940A1000 940FXC1A 02

(*) Versions with oversized brake calipers (16" tyres excluded)


(***) For versions/markets, where provided
(****) Towable load 1300 kg
(*****) Trim levels with oversized brake calipers (towable load 1300 kg)
(******) Towable load 0 kg (for specific countries)
(*******) Trim levels with oversized brake calipers (towable load 0 kg for specific countries)

224
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 225

DIESEL VERSIONS

Versions Engine code Bodywork versions


940FXD1A 03E
1.6 JTDM 105 HP 940A3000
940FXD1A 03F (*)
940FXS1A 17
2.0 JTDM 136 HP (**) 940B6000
940FXS1A 17B (*)
940FXZ11 21C
2.0 JTDM 163 HP TCT (**) 940B9000
940FXZ11 21D (*)
940FXQ1A 15
2.0 JTDM 150 HP 940B5000
940FXQ1A 15B (*)
940FXV11 20C
2.0 JTDM 175 HP TCT 940B4000
940FXV11 20D (*)

(*) Versions with oversized brake calipers (16" tyres excluded)


(**) For versions/markets, where provided

225
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 226

ENGINE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL INFORMATION 1.4 Turbo Petrol 105 HP (*) 1.4 Turbo Petrol 120 HP

Engine code 940B8000 940B7000


Cycle Otto Otto
Number and arrangement of cylinders 4 in line 4 in line
Piston bore and stroke (mm) 72.0 x 84.0 72.0 x 84.0
Total displacement (cm) 1368 1368
Compression ratio 9.8 9.8
Maximum power (EC) (kW) 77 88
Maximum power (EC) (HP) 105 120
corresponding engine speed (rpm) 5000 5000
Maximum torque (EC) (Nm) 215 215
Maximum torque (EC) (kgm) 22 22
corresponding engine speed (rpm) 2500 2500
Spark plugs NGK IKR9J8 NGK IKR9J8
Unleaded petrol 95 RON (EN 228 Unleaded petrol 95 RON (EN 228
Fuel
Specification) Specification)

(*) For versions/markets, where provided

226
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 227

GENERAL INFORMATION 1.4 Turbo MultiAir 163 HP (*) 1.4 Turbo MultiAir 170 HP

Engine code 955A8000 940A2000


Cycle Otto Otto
Number and arrangement of cylinders 4 in line 4 in line
Piston bore and stroke (mm) 72.0 x 84.0 72.0 x 84.0
Total displacement (cm) 1368 1368
Compression ratio 10 10
Maximum power (EC) (kW) 120 125
Maximum power (EC) (HP) 163 170
corresponding engine speed (rpm) 5500 5500
NATURAL DYNAMIC NATURAL DYNAMIC
Maximum torque (EC) (Nm) 230 250 230 250
Maximum torque (EC) (kgm) 23.4 25.4 23.4 25.4
corresponding engine speed (rpm) 2250 2500 2250 2500
Spark plugs NGK IKR9J8 NGK IKR9J8
Unleaded petrol 95 RON or 98 RON Unleaded petrol 95 RON or 98 RON
Fuel
(EN 228 Specification) (EN 228 Specification)

(*) For versions/markets, where provided

227
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 228
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL INFORMATION 1750 Turbo Petrol 235 HP (*) 1.6 JTDM 105 HP

Engine code 940A1000 940A3000


Cycle Otto Diesel
Number and arrangement of cylinders 4 in line 4 in line
Piston bore and stroke (mm) 83.0 x 80.5 79.5 80.5
Total displacement (cm) 1742 1598
Compression ratio 9.8 16.5
Maximum power (EC) (kW) 172.5 77
Maximum power (EC) (HP) 235 105
corresponding engine speed (rpm) 5500 4000
NATURAL DYNAMIC NATURAL DYNAMIC
Maximum torque (EC) (Nm) 300 340 280 320
Maximum torque (EC) (kgm) 30.5 34.6 28.5 32.6
corresponding engine speed (rpm) 4500 1900 1500 1750
Spark plugs NGK ILKAR7D6G
Unleaded petrol 98 RON or 95 RON Diesel for automotive engines (EN
Fuel
(EN 228 Specification) 590 Specification)

(*) For versions/markets, where provided

228
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 229

GENERAL INFORMATION 2.0 JTDM 150 HP 2.0 JTDM 136 HP(*)


Engine code 940B5000 940B6000
Cycle Diesel Diesel
Number and arrangement of cylinders 4 in line 4 in line
Piston bore and stroke (mm) 83 x 90.4 83 x 90.4
Total displacement (cm) 1956 1956
Compression ratio 16.5 16.5
NATURAL DYNAMIC
Maximum power (EC) (kW) 103 110 100
Maximum power (EC) (HP) 140 150 136
corresponding engine speed (rpm) 3750 3750 3750
NATURAL DYNAMIC NATURAL DYNAMIC
Maximum torque (EC) (Nm) 320 380 320 380
Maximum torque (EC) (kgm) 32.5 38.7 32.5 38.7
corresponding engine speed (rpm) 1500 1750 1500 1750
Spark plugs
Diesel for automotive engines (EN Diesel for automotive engines (EN 590
Fuel
590 Specification) Specification)

(*) For versions/markets, where provided

229
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 230
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL INFORMATION 2.0 JTD M 175 HP 2.0 JTDM 163 HP(*)


Type code 940B4000 940B9000
Cycle Diesel Diesel
Number and arrangement of cylinders 4 in line 4 in line
Piston bore and stroke (mm) 83 x 90.4 83 x 90.4
Total displacement (cm) 1956 1956
Compression ratio 16.5 16.5
NATURAL DYNAMIC
Maximum power (EC) (kW) 125 128.5 120
Maximum power (EC) (HP) 170 175 163
corresponding engine speed (rpm) 3750 3750 4000
NATURAL DYNAMIC NATURAL DYNAMIC
Maximum torque (EC) (Nm) 320 350 320 350
Maximum torque (EC) (kgm) 32.5 35.6 32.5 35.6
corresponding engine speed (rpm) 1500 1750 1500 1750
Spark plugs
Diesel for automotive engines (EN Diesel for automotive engines (EN 590
Fuel
590 Specification) Specification)

(*) For versions/markets, where provided

230
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 231

FUEL SUPPLY

Versions Fuel supply


Phased sequential electronic injection with knock control and
1.4 Turbo MultiAir
variable intake valve actuation
Electronically controlled phased sequential multipoint
1.4 Turbo Petrol - 1750 Turbo Petrol
electronic injection with turbo and intercooler
Electronically controlled Common Rail MultiJet direct injection
1.6 JTDM - 2.0 JTDM
with turbo and intercooler

158)

WARNING

158) Modifications or repairs to the fuel supply system that are not carried out correctly or do not take the system
technical specifications into account can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.

231
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 232

TRANSMISSION
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Versions Gearbox Clutch Drive


1.4 Turbo Petrol
1.4 Turbo MultiAir Six forward speed plus
reverse with synchronisers Self-adjusting pedal without
1750 Turbo Petrol Front
for the engagement of the idle stroke
1.6 JTDM forward speeds
2.0 JTDM

232
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 233

BRAKES

Versions Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake


1.4 Turbo Petrol
1.4 Turbo MultiAir
Controlled by hand lever,
1750 Turbo Petrol Self-ventilated discs Disc
acting on the rear brakes
1.6 JTDM
2.0 JTDM

IMPORTANT Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake disks reducing braking efficiency the first time
the brakes are applied.

233
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 234

SUSPENSION
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Versions Front Rear


1.4 Turbo Petrol
1.4 Turbo MultiAir
MacPherson independent wheel with anti-
1750 Turbo Petrol Multi-link structure system
roll bar
1.6 JTDM
2.0 JTDM

234
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 235

STEERING SYSTEM

Versions Turning circle (kerb to kerb) Type


1.4 Turbo Petrol
1.4 Turbo MultiAir
Rack and pinion with electro-mechanical
1750 Turbo Petrol 10.925 m
power steering (Dual Pinion architecture)
1.6 JTDM
2.0 JTDM

235
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 236

WHEELS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Load rating (capacity)


RIMS AND TYRES 61 = 257 kg 77 = 412 kg
Pressed steel or alloy rims. Tubeless 62 = 265 kg 78 = 425 kg
radial carcass tyres. All approved tyres
are listed in the registration document. 63 = 272 kg 79 = 437 kg
64 = 280 kg 80 = 450 kg
IMPORTANT If there are any
discrepancies between the Owner 65 = 290 kg 81 = 462 kg
199 A0K0043
Handbook and the registration
document, take the information from 66 = 300 kg 82 = 475 kg
the latter. For safe driving, the car must Maximum speed index
67 = 307 kg 83 = 487 kg
be fitted with tyres of the same make Q up to 160 km/h
and type on all wheels. R up to 170 km/h 68 = 315 kg 84 = 500 kg
S up to 180 km/h 69 = 325 kg 85 = 515 kg
IMPORTANT Do not use tubes with
T up to 190 km/h
tubeless tires. 70 = 335 kg 86 = 530 kg
U up to 200 km/h
SPACE-SAVER WHEEL H up to 210 km/h 71 = 345 kg 87 = 545 kg

Pressed steel rim. Tubeless tyre. V up to 240 km/h 72 = 355 kg 88 = 560 kg


W up to 270 km/h 73 = 365 kg 89 = 580 kg
CORRECT TYRE READING Y up to 300 km/h
74 = 375 kg 90 = 600 kg
Example fig. 199:
205/55 R 16 91V Maximum speed index 75 = 387 kg 91 = 615 kg
for snow tyres
205 Rated width (S, distance in mm
QM + S up to 160 km/h
between sidewalls)
TM + S up to 190 km/h
55 Height/width ratio (H/S) as a
percentage HM + S up to 210 km/h
R Radial tyre
16 Rim diameter in inches () Load rating (capacity)
91 Load rating (capacity) 60 = 250 kg 76 = 400 kg
V Maximum speed index

236
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 237

CORRECT READING OF RIM PROTECTOR TYRES


THE RIM CODE
159)
Example fig. 199: 7 J x
16 H2 ET 41
7 rim diameter in inches (1).
J profile of the flange (side projection
where the tyre bead rests) (2). WARNING
16 rim fitting diameter in inches
(corresponds to diameter of the tyre 159) DO NOT fit wheel caps when
to be mounted) (3 = ). using integral wheel caps fixed
(with springs) to the steel rim and
H2 shape and number of humps
after-sale tyres provided with
(circumference measurement which
Rim Protector (fig. 200). Use of
keeps the bead of Tubeless tyres unsuitable tyres and wheel caps
in position on the rim). may cause sudden loss of tyre
ET 41 wheel camber (distance between pressure.
the disc/rim support plane and
the wheel rim centre line).

200 A0K0159

237
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 238

RIMS AND TYRES PROVIDED AS STANDARD


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Space-saver wheel
Versions Rims Tyres provided Snow tyres
Rim Tyre
195/55 R16 91V 195/55 R16 91Q
1.4 Turbo 7Jx16 H2 ET 41 (*)
REINFORCED (*) REINFORCED (*)
Petrol T135/70 R16
7Jx16 H2 ET 41 205/55 R16 91V 205/55 R16 91Q 4B x 16 ET 22
1.4Turbo 100M
4B x 17 ET 25
MultiAir 7 1/2 Jx17 H2 ET 41 225/45 R17 91W 225/45 R17 91Q T125/80 R17
1.6JTDM 99M
2.0JTDM 7 1/2 Jx18 H2 ET 41 225/40 R18 92W 225/40 R18 92Q
(*) REINFORCED (*) (**) REINFORCED
1.4 Turbo
7 1/2 Jx17 H2 ET 41 225/45 R17 91W 225/45 R17 91Q
Petrol (***)
1.4Turbo T125/80 R17 4B x 17 ET 25
MultiAir (***) 225/40 R18 92W 225/40 R18 92Q 99M
1.6 JTDM (***) 7 1/2 Jx18 H2 ET 41
REINFORCED (**) REINFORCED
2.0 JTDM (***)
7 1/2 Jx17 H2 ET 41 225/45 R17 91W 225/45 R17 91Q
1750 Turbo T125/80 R17 4B x 17 ET 25
Petrol (*) 225/40 R18 92W 225/40 R18 92Q 99M
7 1/2 Jx18 H2 ET 41
REINFORCED (**) REINFORCED

(*) For versions/markets, where provided


(**) Tyres which cannot be fitted with chains
(***) Versions with oversized brake calipers
On versions with 195/55 R16", 205/55 R16" e 225/45 R17" tyres, reduced size snow chains can be used, with a maximum
projection of 9 mm beyond the tyre profile.

238
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 239

COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)

TYRES PROVIDED
MEDIUM LOAD FULL LOAD
VERSIONS MEASUREMENT
Front Rear Front Rear
195/55 R16 91V REINFORCED 2,6 2,2 3,0 2,6
1.4 Turbo petrol
205/55 R16 91V 2,3 2,1 2,7 2,3
115/120 HP
225/45 R17 91W 2,3 2,1 2,7 2,3
1.6 JTDM
225/40 R18 92W REINFORCED 2,6 2,2 3,0 2,6
195/55 R16 91V REINFORCED 2,6 2,2 2,9 2,5
1.4 Turbo Petrol 205/55 R16 91V 2,3 2,1 2,5 2,1
105 HP (*) 225/45 R17 91W 2,3 2,1 2,6 2,2
225/40 R18 92W REINFORCED 2,5 2,3 2,9 2,5
195/55 R16 91V REINFORCED 2,6 2,2 3,0 2,6
1.4 Turbo MultiAir 205/55 R16 91V 2,3 2,1 2,7 2,3
2.0 JTDM 225/45 R17 91W 2,3 2,1 2,7 2,3
225/40 R18 92W REINFORCED 2,6 2,2 3,0 2,6
1750 Turbo Petrol 225/45 R17 91W 2,3 2,1 2,7 2,3
(*) 225/40 R18 92W REINFORCED 2,6 2,2 3,0 2,6
T135/70 R16 100M
Space-saver wheel 4.2
T125/80 R17 99M

(*) For versions/markets, where provided


Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed pressure when the tyres are warm. Check correct pressure on a cold tyre.
With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard tyres.
When travelling at speeds over 160 km/h, inflate the tyres to the values specified for fully laden conditions.

239
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 240

DIMENSIONS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Dimensions are expressed in mm and refer to the vehicle equipped with its original tyres. Height is measured with car unladen.
BOOT VOLUME Unladen capacity (V.D.A. standards): = 350 dm3

201 A0K0822

A B C D E F G H
4351 955 2634 762 1465 1554 1798 1554

Small variations in size are possible depending on the dimensions of the rims

240
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 241

PERFORMANCE

Acceleration from 0-100


Versions Top speed (km/h) km/h (secs)
1.4 Turbo Petrol 120 HP 195 9,4
1.4 Turbo Petrol 105 HP (*) 186 10,9
1.4 Turbo MultiAir 163/170 HP (*) 218 7,8
1.4 Turbo MultiAir 163 HP TCT (*) 218 7.7
1.4 Turbo MultiAir 170 HP TCT 218 7.7
1750 Turbo Petrol 235 HP (*) 242 6.8
1.6 JTDM 105 HP 185 11,3
2.0 JTDM 136 HP (*) 205
2.0 JTDM 150 HP 210 8,8
2.0 JTDM 163 HP TCT (*) 215 8.2
2.0 JTDM 175 HP TCT 219 7.8

(*) For versions/markets, where provided

241
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 242

WEIGHTS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Weights 1.4 Turbo Petrol 1.4 Turbo MultiAir(*) 1.4 Turbo MultiAir(**)
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank
filled to 90% and without optional 1280 1290 1305
equipment)
Payload including the driver (***) 505 505 505
Maximum permitted loads (****)
front axle 1100 1100 1100
rear axle 850 850 850
total 1785 1795 1810
Towable loads (kg)
- braked trailer 1300 1300 1300 / 0 (****)
trailer without brakes 500 500 500
Maximum load on roof 50 50 60
Maximum load on tow hitch (trailer with
60 60 60
brakes)

(*) Versions with manual gearbox


(**) Versions with Alfa TCT
(***) If special equipment is fitted (sun roof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload in relation to the maximum
permitted loads.
(****) Hot-humid climate countries

242
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:4 Pagina 243

Weights 1750 Turbo Petrol 235 HP (*) 1.6 JTDM

Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to


1320 1310
90% and without optional equipment)
Payload including the driver (**) 505 505
Maximum permitted loads (***)
front axle 1100 1100
rear axle 850 850
total 1825 1815
Towable loads (kg)
1300
- braked trailer 1300
trailer without brakes 500 500
Maximum load on roof 50 50
Maximum load on tow hitch (trailer with brakes) 60 60

(*) For versions/markets, where provided


(**) If special equipment is fitted (sun roof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload in relation to the maximum
permitted loads.
(***) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads.

243
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:5 Pagina 244
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Weights 2.0 JTDM (*) 2.0 JTDM (**)


Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to
1320 1335
90% and without optional equipment)
Payload including the driver (***) 505 505
Maximum permitted loads (****)
front axle 1100 1100
rear axle 850 850
total 1825 1840
Towable loads (kg)
1300
- braked trailer 1300 / 600 (*****)
trailer without brakes 500 500
Maximum load on roof 50 50
Maximum load on tow hitch (trailer with brakes) 60 60

(*) Versions with manual gearbox


(**) Versions with Alfa TCT
(***) If special equipment is fitted (sun roof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload in relation to the maximum
permitted loads.
(****) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted
loads.
(*****) 2.0 JTDM 163 HP TCT versions

244
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:5 Pagina 245

REFUELLING

1.4 Turbo Petrol 1.4 Turbo MultiAir Recommended fuels


and original lubricants
litres kg litres kg

Fuel tank 60 60 Unleaded petrol not less


than 95 RON (EN 228
including a reserve of 8 - 10 8 - 10 specification)
50-50 mixture of
Engine cooling system (with
5,7 5,0 5,7 5,0 demineralised water and
climate control)
PARAFLU UP (*)
SELENIA K P.E. (1.4 Turbo
Engine sump 2,75 2,3 3,1 2,6 Petrol versions)
SELENIA DIGITECH P.E.
Engine sump and filter 3,1 2,6 3,5 2,9 (1.4 Turbo MultiAir
versions)
TUTELA TRANSMISSION
Differential/gearbox casing 2.0 1.7 2.0 1,7
GEARFORCE
Hydraulic brake circuit with
0,83 0,78 0,83 0,78 TUTELA TOP 4
ABS antilock brakes
Windscreen/rear window/ Mixture of water and
headlight washer fluid 2,8 (4,6) 2,5 (4,1) 2,8 (4,6) 2,5 (4,1) TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
reservoir (**) SC 35

(*) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% UP and 40% demineralised water is recommended.
(**) Values in brackets refer to versions with headlight washers

245
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:5 Pagina 246
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1750 Turbo Petrol 235 HP (*) Prescribed fuels and original


lubricants
litres kg
Fuel tank 60 Unleaded petrol not less than 95
including a reserve of 8 - 10 RON (EN 228 specification)

Engine cooling system (with climate Mixture of 50% demineralised water


6,4 5,7
control) and 50% PARAFLUUP (***)
Engine sump 5,0 4,25
SELENIA SPORT POWER
Engine sump and filter 5,1 4,35
TUTELA TRANSMISSION
Automatic transmission casing 2,0 1,7
GEARFORCE
Hydraulic brake circuit with ABS (Anti-
0,83 0,78 TUTELA TOP 4
lock braking system)
Windscreen/rear window/headlight Mixture of water and TUTELA
2,8 (4,6) 2,5 (4,1)
washer fluid reservoir (**) PROFESSIONAL SC 35

(*) For versions/markets, where provided


(**) Values in brackets refer to versions with headlight washers
(***) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% UP and 40% demineralised water is recommended.

246
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:5 Pagina 247

1.6 JTDM 2.0 JTDM Recommended fuels


litres kg litres kg and original lubricants

Fuel tank 60 60 Diesel for automotive


engines (EN 590
including a reserve of 8 - 10 8 - 10 Specification)
50-50 mixture of
Engine cooling system (with
6,8 6,0 6,7 5,9 demineralised water and
climate control)
PARAFLU UP (**)
Engine sump 4,0 3,4 4,0 3,4
Engine sump (versions with
4.4 3.6
Alfa TCT)
SELENIA WR FORWARD
Engine sump and filter 4,2 3,5 4,2 3,5
Engine sump and filter
4.8 4.0
(versions with Alfa TCT)
TUTELA TRANSMISSION
Differential/gearbox casing 2.0 1.7 2.0 1.7
GEARFORCE
Hydraulic brake circuit with
0,83 0,78 0,83 0,78 TUTELA TOP 4
ABS antilock brakes
Windscreen/rear window/ Mixture of water and
headlight washer fluid 2,8 (4,6) 2,5 (4,1) 2,8 (4,6) 2,5 (4,1) TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
reservoir (*) SC 35

(*) Values in brackets refer to versions with headlight washers


(**) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% UP and 40% demineralised water is recommended.

247
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:5 Pagina 248

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Your car is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of the
Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission
specifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration.

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

Use Fluid and lubricant features for a correct use Genuine fluids and Replacement interval
of the car lubricants
Lubricant for
petrol engines SAE 5W-40 ACEA C3 grade totally synthetic SELENIA K P.E. According to
(1.4 Turbo Petrol lubricant Contractual Technical Scheduled Servicing
versions) FIAT 9.55535-S2 classification Reference No. F603.D08 Plan
41)

Lubricant for
petrol engines SAE 0W-30 ACEA C2 grade totally synthetic SELENIA DIGITEK P.E. According to
(1.4 Turbo MultiAir lubricant Contractual Technical Scheduled Servicing
versions) FIAT 9.55535-GS1 classification Reference no. F020.B12 Plan
41)

248
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:5 Pagina 249

Use Fluid and lubricant features for a correct use Genuine fluids and Replacement interval
of the car lubricants
Lubricant for
SELENIA SPORT
petrol engines (for SAE 5W-40 ACEA C3 grade totally synthetic According to
POWER
1750 Turbo petrol lubricant Scheduled Servicing
Contractual Technical
versions only) FIAT 9.55535-GH2 classification Plan
Reference No. F052.H12
41)

SELENIA WR
Lubricant for SAE 0W-30 ACEA C2 grade totally synthetic According to
FORWARD
diesel engines lubricant Scheduled Servicing
Contractual Technical
41) FIAT 9.55535-DS1 classification Plan
Reference No. F842.F13

In case of emergency, if lubricants with the prescribed specifications are not available, products with the minimum indicated
ACEA performance can be used for topping up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.
For MultiAir system engines only use lubricants with indicated SAE grade and specifications.

IMPORTANT

41) The use of products with different specifications than those indicated above could cause damage to the engine that
is not covered by the warranty.

249
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:5 Pagina 250
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Use Fluid and lubricant features for a correct use Genuine fluids and Applications
of the car lubricants
TUTELA
TRANSMISSION Gearboxes and
SAE 75W grade synthetic lubricant.
GEARFORCE differentials
FIAT 9.55550-MZ6 classification
Contractual Technical (mechanical)
Reference No. F002.F10
Lubricants and
greases for drive Molybdenum disulphide grease, for use at high TUTELA ALL STAR
Wheel side constant
transmission temperatures. NL.G.I. 1-2 consistency Contractual Technical
velocity joints
FIAT 9.55580 classification Reference No. F702.G07
Grease for constant velocity joints with low friction TUTELA STAR 700
Differential-side
coefficient. NL.G.I. 0-1 consistency Contractual Technical
constant velocity joints
FIAT 9.55580 classification Reference No. F701.C07
Lubricant for
TUTELA CS SPEED
electro-hydraulic Fully synthetic oil with dedicated additive Lubricant for electro-
Contractual Technical
actuator (versions FIAT 9.55550-SA1 classification hydraulic actuator
Reference No. F005.F98
with Alfa TCT)
Synthetic fluid for brake and clutch systems.
TUTELA TOP 4 Hydraulic brakes and
Exceeds specifications: FMVSS no. 116 DOT 4,
Brake fluid Contractual Technical hydraulic clutch
ISO 4925, SAE J1704.
Reference No. F001.A93 controls
FIAT 9.55597 classification

250
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:5 Pagina 251

Use Fluid and lubricant features for a correct use Genuine fluids and Applications
of the car lubricants
Red protective agent with antifreeze action, based
Usage percentage:
on inhibited monoethylene glycol with organic PARAFLUUP (*)
Protective agent 50% demineralised
formula. Exceeds the CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D Contractual Technical
for radiators water 50%
3306 specifications. Reference No. F101.M01
PARAFLUUP (**)
FIAT 9.55523 classification
TUTELA DIESEL ART
Diesel fuel Antifreeze additive for diesel, with protective action To be mixed with diesel
Contractual Technical
additive for diesel engines. (25 cc per 10 litres)
Reference No. F601.L06
TUTELA
Windscreen/rear Mixture of alcohol, water and surfactants CUNA To be used diluted or
PROFESSIONAL SC 35
window/headlight NC 956-11 undiluted in screen
Contractual Technical
washer fluid FIAT 9.55522 classification washer/wiper systems
Reference No. F201.D02

(*)IMPORTANT Do not top up or mix with other fluids which have different specifications from those described.
(**)When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a mixture of 60% PARAFLUUP and 40% demineralised water.

251
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:5 Pagina 252

FUEL CONSUMPTION
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The fuel consumption figures given in the tables below are determined on the basis of the type-approval tests laid down by
specific European Directives.
The procedures below are followed for measuring consumption:
urban cycle: cold starting followed by driving that simulates urban use of the car;
extra-urban cycle: frequent accelerating in all gears, simulating extra-urban use of the car: speed varies between 0 and 120
km/h;
combined fuel consumption: calculated with a weighting of approximately 37% of the urban cycle and 63% of the extra-
urban cycle.

IMPORTANT The type of route, traffic conditions, weather conditions, driving style, general condition of the car, trim level/
equipment/accessories, use of the climate control, car load, presence of roof racks and other situations that adversely affect
the aerodynamics or wind resistance lead to different fuel consumption figures than those measured.

FUEL CONSUMPTION ACCORDING TO THE CURRENT EUROPEAN DIRECTIVE (litres/100 km)

Versions Urban Extra-urban Combined


1.4 Turbo Petrol 8,3 5,3 6,4
1.4 Turbo MultiAir 7,6 4,6 5,7
1.4 Turbo MultiAir 163/170 HP TCT 6.6 4.3 5.1
1.4 Turbo MultiAir 170 HP TCT (*) 6.4 4.2 5.0
1750 Turbo Petrol 235 HP (*) 10.8 5.8 7.6
1.6 JTDM 105 HP 5,0 3,4 4,0
2.0 JTDM 136/150 HP 5.0 3.7 4.2
2.0 JTDM 163 HP TCT (*) 5.2 3.9 4.4

(*) For versions/markets, where provided

252
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:5 Pagina 253

Versions Urban Extra-urban Combined


2.0 JTDM 175 HP TCT 5.2 3.9 4.4

253
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:5 Pagina 254

CO2 EMISSIONS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The CO2 emission levels given in the following tables refer to combined consumption.

Versions CO2 emissions according to the current European directive (g/km)


1.4 Turbo Petrol 148
1.4 Turbo MultiAir 163/170 HP 131
1.4 Turbo MultiAir 170 HP TCT 119
1.4 Turbo MultiAir 163 HP TCT (*) 119
1.4 Turbo MultiAir 170 HP TCT (*) 117
1750 Turbo Petrol 235 HP (*) 177
1.6 JTDM 105 HP 104
2.0 JTDM 136/150 HP 110
2.0 JTDM 175 HP TCT 116
2.0 JTDM 163 HP TCT (*) 116

(*) For versions/markets, where provided

254
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:5 Pagina 255

PRESCRIPTIONS FOR HANDLING THE VEHICLE AT THE END OF


ITS LIFE
For years, Alfa Romeo has pursued a global commitment to protect and respect the environment by continually improving its
production processes and developing increasingly eco-compatible products. To ensure its customers the best possible service
in compliance with environmental standards and in response to obligations arising out of European Directive 2000/53/EC on
end of life vehicles, Alfa Romeo offers its customers the chance to hand back their vehicles (*) at the end of their life cycle at no
additional cost.
The European Directive sets out that when the vehicle is handed over the last keeper or owner should not incur any expenses
as a result of it having a zero or negative market value. In particular, in almost all European Union countries, until 1st January
2007, vehicles registered after 1st July 2002 will be collected free of charge, whilst from 2007 collection will be free of charge
irrespective of the year of registration as long as the vehicle contains its basic components (in particular, the engine and
bodywork) and has no additional waste.
To hand your vehicle over at the end of its life without extra cost, contact one of our dealerships or an Alfa Romeo authorised
collection and scrapping centre. These centres have been carefully chosen to offer high-quality service for the collection,
treatment and recycling of vehicles at their end of life, respecting the surrounding environment.
You can find further information on these collection and scrapping centres either from an Alfa Romeo Dealership or by calling
the freephone number 00800 2532 0000 or on the Alfa Romeo website.
(*) Vehicle for transporting passengers with a maximum of nine seats and a total permitted weight of 3.5 t

255
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
19-3-2014 10:5 Pagina 256

WHAT TO DO IF

Fault Possible solution


... A TYRE IS PUNCTURED. Use the Fix&Go Automatic tyre repair kit. See page 170.
... A TYRE DEFLATES. Restore the correct pressure. See page 236.
See page 211 or contact an
... THE BATTERY IS FLAT.
Alfa Romeo Dealership.
... THE INTERNAL ROOF LIGHTS DO NOT See page 180 or contact an
Replace the bulb.
COME ON. Alfa Romeo Dealership.
See page 181 or contact an
Check the relevant protection fuse.
... AN EXTERNAL BULB (main beam, dipped Alfa Romeo Dealership.
beam headlights...) DOES NOT COME ON. See page 177 or contact an
Replace the bulb.
Alfa Romeo Dealership.
... THE REMOTE CONTROL DOES NOT Replace the batteries inside the remote
See page 12.
WORK. control.
... THE KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROL HAS
Request an additional remote control. See page 12
BEEN LOST.
See page 181 or contact an
Check the relevant protection fuse.
... AN ELECTRIC WINDOW DOES NOT Alfa Romeo Dealership.
WORK Have the relevant window raising / lowering Contact an Alfa Romeo
motor checked Dealership.
... AN INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING
See page 99.
LIGHT SWITCHES ON.
... THE ENGINE DOES NOT START, THE
The battery is flat; it needs replacing. See page 211.
STARTER DOES NOT TURN

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


19-3-2014 10:5 Pagina 257

Fault Possible solution


... THE ENGINE DOES NOT START OR
Check that there is sufficient fuel in the tank. See page 245.
STOPS WHEN DRIVING.
... THE ENGINE DOES NOT START Check whether the fuel cut-off system has
See page 45.
FOLLOWING AN IMPACT. intervened.
... ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE TOO See page 209, contact an
Check the engine coolant level.
HIGH INDICATION. Alfa Romeo Dealership.
... EXCESSIVE BRAKE PAD WEAR Contact an Alfa Romeo
Replace the worn brake pads.
INDICATION. Dealership.
... IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO ENGAGE THE Contact a dedicated Alfa
Have the gearbox/transmission checked.
GEARS. Romeo Dealership.
... LOSS OF ENGINE PERFORMANCE,
See page 74, contact an Alfa
POOR DRIVEABILITY, HIGH EXHAUST Have the EOBD/injection system checked.
Romeo Dealership.
EMISSIONS AND CONSUMPTION.
See page 63, contact an Alfa
... THE ABS DOES NOT WORK. Have the ABS checked.
Romeo Dealership.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
DASHBOARD
The presence and position of controls, instruments and gauges may vary according to different versions.

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONS

1 A0K0730

1. Adjustable air vent 2. Passenger front air bag 3. Control buttons 4. Windscreen wiper/rearscreen wiper/trip computer control lever 5. Instrument
panel 6. Exterior lighting control lever 7. Driver front air bag 8. Cruise Control (for versions/markets, where provided) 9. Uconnect Radio/Uconnect
Radio Nav (for versions/markets, where provided) 10. Heating/ventilation/climate control system controls 11. Glove compartment

259
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CONTROL PANEL AND INSTRUMENTS
RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONS

VERSIONS WITH MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY

2 A0K2302

A. Speedometer (speed indicator) B. Multifunctional display C. Rev counter D. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light
E. Engine coolant temperature gauge and excessive temperature warning light
warning lights supplied in diesel versions only. On diesel versions the rpm gauge end of scale is set at 6000 rpm.
WARNING Instrument background colour and type may vary according to the version.

260
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
VERSIONS WITH RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONS

3 A0K2303

A. Speedometer (speed indicator) B. Reconfigurable multifunctional display C. Rev counter D. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light E.
Engine coolant temperature gauge and excessive temperature warning light
warning lights supplied in diesel versions only. On diesel versions the rpm gauge end of scale is set at 6000 rpm.
WARNING Instrument background colour and type may vary according to the version.

261
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CHANGING A FUSE
RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONS

The fuses are located in the fusebox


shown in fig. 5.
FUSEBOX ON Note For fuse protected devices refer
DASHBOARD to the description of In an emergency
Insert a hand in the seat A fig. 4 and chapter.
lower the flap B to access the fuses.

4 A0K0731

5 A0K0249

262
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NOTES

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
INDEX Brakes ........................................... 233 Upper air diffusers ..................... 22
brake fluid level.......................... 209 Climatic comfort............................. 23
ABS.............................................. 62
bulb replacement ........................... 178 Diffusers .................................... 23
Additional heater ............................ 35
Bulb replacement Clutch ............................................ 232
AFS adaptive lights (Adaptive
Frontlight System) ........................ 38 exterior lights............................. 177 CO2 emissions............................... 254
Air cleaner...................................... 210 interior lights.............................. 180 CODE Card.................................... 11
Alarm ............................................. 14 Bulbs Control buttons .............................. 85
types of bulbs ........................... 175 Control panel and instruments ....... 94
Alfa DNA system ........................ 66
Multifunction display .................. 94
Driving modes ........................... 66 Carrying children safely ................. 133
Reconfigurable multifunction
"Natural" Mode.......................... 67 CBC (Cornering Brake Control) display....................................... 95
system ......................................... 63
Alfa Romeo Code system ............. 10 Central locking ............................... 45
Controls ......................................... 44
ALFA TCT ...................................... 151 Courtesy light
Changing a bulb............................. 173
Ashtray .......................................... 48 bulb replacement ...................... 181
General instructions................... 173
ASR system (Anti-Slip Cruise Control ................................ 40
Changing a wheel .......................... 165
Regulation)................................... 63
Checking levels .............................. 205 Daytime running lights (DRL) ......... 35
Automatic dual zone climate
control ......................................... 28 Cigar lighter.................................... 48 Diesel filter ..................................... 210
Battery.......................................... 211 Cleaning and maintenance Dimensions .................................... 240
advice for extending lifetime ...... 211 bodywork.................................. 216 Dipped beam headlights
replacement .............................. 211 car interior ................................. 218 bulb replacement ...................... 177
Battery (recharging) ........................ 191 front headlights ......................... 217 Direction indicators................... 37-178
Bodywork leather parts .............................. 218 bulb replacement ...................... 178
maintenance ............................. 216 leather seats.............................. 218 Lane change function ............. 37
protection against plastic and coated parts............ 218 Display ........................................... 84
atmospheric agents................... 216 seats and fabric parts................ 218 Doors............................................. 51
warranty .................................... 216 Climate control............................... 22 Child safety device .................... 52
Bonnet........................................... 59 Central air diffusers.................... 22 Door central
Closing...................................... 59 Rear air diffuser ......................... 22 locking/unlocking ...................... 51
Opening .................................... 59 Side air diffusers........................ 22 DPF (particulate filter) ..................... 81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


DST system (Dynamic Steering Fix&Go Automatic kit...................... 170 Light beam direction.................. 61
INDEX

Torque)......................................... 64 Flashing ......................................... 37 Headlight washers ......................... 215


Dual Pinion active steering ............. 74 Fluids and lubricants ...................... 248 Head restraints............................... 18
Dusk sensor................................... 36 Fog lights ................................. 44-178 "Anti-Whiplash" device .............. 19
EBD system.................................. 62
"Follow Me Home" device ............. 37
Front headrests ......................... 18
Electric sun roof ............................. 49 Rear head restraints .................. 19
Electric windows ............................ 53 Front airbags................................. 140 Hill Holder system .......................... 63
Controls .................................... 53 Front armrest ................................. 46
Front driver side airbag................... 140
Identification data
"Electronic Q2" system ("E-Q2") .... 64 bodywork paint plate................. 222
Front passenger airbag .................. 140
Engine codes - bodywork Chassis marking........................ 222
versions ....................................... 223 Front roof light
engine marking.......................... 222
Engine compartment bulb replacement ...................... 180
identification data plate.............. 222
washing .................................... 217 Fuel consumption .......................... 252
Ignition device ................................ 15
Engine coolant temperature Fuel cut-off system......................... 45
Steering lock ............................. 16
indicator....................................... 96 Fuel level gauge ............................. 96
Installing a Universal Isofix child
Engine............................................ 226 Fuel supply..................................... 231 seat.............................................. 137
engine cooling system fluid Fuel tank cap ................................. 80 Installing electrical/electronic
level........................................... 209 devices ........................................ 76
Fuses (if a fuse blows) .................... 181
marking..................................... 222 Interior fittings ................................ 46
Engine oil Gear Shift Indicator .......................85
Interiors (cleaning) .......................... 218
consumption ............................. 208 Glove compartment courtesy
light iTPMS system................................ 72
level check ................................ 208
EOBD system ................................ 74
bulb replacement ...................... 181 Jack.............................................. 165

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) Handbrake.................................... 149 Light clusters


system ......................................... 62 Hazard warning lights..................... 44 front light clusters (changing a
External courtesy lights .................. 38 bulb).......................................... 177
HBA system................................... 64
External lights................................. 35 rear light clusters (changing a
Headlights...................................... 61 bulb).......................................... 178
Extinguisher ................................... 49 Adjusting headlights abroad ...... 61 Luggage compartment courtesy
Filling the tank...............................
80 bulb replacement ...................... 177 light
Fitting "Universal" child seat ........... 134 Headlight alignment corrector.... 61 bulb replacement ...................... 180

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Luggage compartment................... 56 Performance .................................. 241 Refuelling the car ........................... 80
Bag hooks................................. 58 Pollen filter ..................................... 210 Rev counter ................................... 96
Closing the luggage Power sockets ............................... 47 Rim Protector (tyres)....................... 237
compartment ............................ 56 Pre-Fill system (RAB - Ready Roof lights...................................... 42
Emergency luggage Alert Brake) .................................. 64 Courtesy lights .......................... 43
compartment opening ............... 56 Preparation for "Isofix" child seat .... 137 Front roof light ........................... 42
Extending the luggage Pretensioners ................................. 131
compartment ............................ 57 Glove compartment light ........... 43
Load limiters.............................. 131 Luggage compartment roof
Luggage compartment
initialisation................................ 56 Protecting the environment ............ 81 light ........................................... 43
Luggage retaining net................ 58 Radio transmitters and mobile Rear roof light............................ 43
Opening the luggage phones ........................................ 76 Roof rack/ski rack .......................... 60
compartment ............................ 56 Rain sensor.................................... 39 Safe Lock (device)......................... 13
Securing your load .................... 58 Raising the car ............................... 192 Saving fuel ..................................... 158
Main beam headlights .................. 37 Rear armrest .................................. 47 SBR system (Seat Belt
Rear fog lights................................ 44 Reminder) .................................... 129
bulb replacement ...................... 177
Rear fog lights/reversing lights........ 178 Scheduled servicing ....................... 196
Maintenance and care
Rear roof light Scheduled Servicing Plan............... 197
heavy-duty use of the car .......... 204
bulb replacement ...................... 180 Seat belts....................................... 128
periodic checks......................... 204
Rear view mirrors ........................... 20 Use ........................................... 128
Manual climate control ................... 24
Door mirrors .............................. 21 Seats ............................................. 16
Menu options................................. 87
Internal mirror ............................ 20 Front seats ................................ 16
Money holder ................................. 48
Rear window washer jets ............... 215 Setup menu ................................... 86
MSR system .................................. 64
Rear window washer Side airbags (Side Bags -
Multifunction display....................... 84 Window Bags).............................. 144
rear window washer fluid level ... 209
Number plate lights Side bags (front side airbags) ......... 144
Rear window washer/wiper ............ 40
bulb replacement ...................... 179 Side lights/brake lights ................... 178
Rear window wiper
Parking .........................................
149 Side lights/daytime running lights
blade replacement..................... 214 (DRL)
Handbrake ................................ 149 Reconfigurable multifunction bulb replacement ...................... 177
Parking lights ................................. 36 display ......................................... 84 Side lights/dipped beam
Parking sensors ............................. 77 Refuelling ....................................... 245 headlights .................................... 36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Ski compartment ........................... 47 Installing a tow hook.................. 160 windscreen washer fluid level .... 209
INDEX

Smart Bag system (Multistage Transmission .................................. 232 Windscreen washer nozzles ........... 214
front airbags)................................ 140 TRIP button.................................... 98 Windscreen washer/wiper .............. 38
Snow chains ................................. 161 Trip Computer ................................ 96 Smart washing function .......... 39
Snow tyres..................................... 160 Tyres Windscreen wiper
Speedometer (speed indicator) ...... 96 correct tyre reading ................... 236 replacing wiper blades............... 213
Starting the engine ......................... 148 Fix&Go Automatic (kit) ............... 170 Wiring for radio system .................. 75
Starting the engine ......................... 164 inflation pressure ....................... 239
Bump starting ........................... 164
Using the Gearbox........................ 150
Jump starting ............................ 164
Start&Stop system ......................... 69 Warning lights and messages....... 99
Steering lock .................................. 16 Weights.......................................... 242
Steering system ............................. 235 Welcome movement ...................... 85
Steering wheel ............................... 19 Wheel rims
Storage compartments .................. 46 correct reading of the rim
code ......................................... 236
Storing the car ............................... 162
Wheels and tyres ........................... 212
Sun visors ...................................... 48
changing a wheel ...................... 165
Suspension .................................... 234
spare wheel............................... 236
Symbols......................................... 10
tyre inflation pressure................. 239
Technical specifications ................ 222 Wheels and tyres provided ............. 238
The keys ........................................ 11 Wheels........................................... 236
CODE Card ............................... 11 rims and tyres ........................... 236
Key without remote control........ 11 Window bags (side airbags for
Key with remote control............. 11 head protection)........................... 144
Third brake lights Window cleaning............................ 38
bulb replacement ...................... 179 Windows (cleaning) ........................ 217
Towing the car ............................... 192 Windscreen/rear window wiper
Attaching the tow hook ............. 192 blades ....................................... 213
Towing trailers ................................ 160 Windscreen washer

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PARTS & SERVICES
TECHNICAL SERVICES SERVICE ENGINEERING
Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 3 10040 Volvera Torino (Italia)
Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A.
Publication no. 60438735 1 Edition 0 4/2014
All rights reserved. Reproduction, even in part is prohibited without written permission
from Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A.

SERVICE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cop Alfa Giulietta EN QUAD 12/03/14 08.33 Pagina 1

ENGLISH

Alfa Services

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

You might also like